Phosphonate Analogs of Hiv Inhibitor Compounds

ABSTRACT

The invention is related to phosphorus substituted anti-viral inhibitory compounds, compositions containing such compounds, and therapeutic methods that include the administration of such compounds, as well as to processes and intermediates useful for preparing such compounds.

This non-provisional application claims the benefit of Provisional Application No. 60/591,811, filed Jul. 27, 2004, and all of which are incorporated herein by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates generally to compounds with antiviral activity and more specifically with anti-HIV properties.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

AIDS is a major public health problem worldwide. Although drugs targeting HIV viruses are in wide use and have shown effectiveness, toxicity and development of resistant strains have limited their usefulness. Assay methods capable of determining the presence, absence or amounts of HIV viruses are of practical utility in the search for inhibitors as well as for diagnosing the presence of HIV.

Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection and related disease is a major public health problem worldwide. The retrovirus human immunodeficiency virus type 1 (HIV-1), a member of the primate lentivirus family (DeClercq E (1994)Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 724:438-456; Barre-Sinoussi F (1996) Lancet, 348:31-35), is generally accepted to be the causative agent of acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) Tarrago et al. FASEB Journal 1994, 8:497-503). AIDS is the result of repeated replication of HIV-1 and a decrease in immune capacity, most prominently a fall in the number of CD4+ lymphocytes. The mature virus has a single stranded RNA genome that encodes 15 proteins (Frankel et al. (1998) Annual Review of Biochemistry, 67:1-25; Katz et al. (1994) Annual Review of Biochemistry, 63:133-173), including three key enzymes: (i) protease (Prt) (von der Helm K (1996) Biological Chemistry, 377:765-774); (ii) reverse transcriptase (RT) (Hottiger et al. (1996) Biological Chemistry Hoppe-Seyler, 377:97-120), an enzyme unique to retroviruses; and (iii) integrate (Asante et al. (1999) Advances in Virus Research 52:351-369; Wlodawer A (1999) Advances in Virus Research 52:335-350; Esposito et al. (1999) Advances in Virus Research 52:319-333). Protease is responsible for processing the viral precursor polyproteins, integrase is responsible for the integration of the double stranded DNA form of the viral genome into host DNA and RT is the key enzyme in the replication of the viral genome. In viral replication, RT acts as both an RNA- and a DNA-dependent DNA polymerase, to convert the single stranded RNA genome into double stranded DNA. Since virally encoded Reverse Transcriptase (RT)-mediates specific reactions during the natural reproduction of the virus, inhibition of HIV RT is an important therapeutic target for treatment of HIV infection and related disease.

Sequence analysis of the complete genomes from several infective and non-infective HIV-isolates has shed considerable light on the make-up of the virus and the types of molecules that are essential for its replication and maturation to an infective species. The HIV protease is essential for the processing of the viral gag and gag-pol polypeptides into mature virion proteins. L. Ratner, et al., Nature, 313:277-284 (1985); L. H. Pearl and W. R. Taylor, Nature, 329:351 (1987). HIV exhibits the same gag/pol/env organization seen in other retroviruses. L. Ratner, et al., above; S. Wain-Hobson, et al., Cell, 40:9-17 (1985); R. Sanchez-Pescador, et al., Science, 227:484-492 (1985); and M. A. Muesing, et al., Nature, 313:450-458 (1985).

Drugs approved in the United States for AIDS therapy include nucleoside inhibitors of RT (Smith et al (1994) Clinical Investigator, 17:226-243), protease inhibitors and non-nucleoside RT inhibitors (NNRTI), (Johnson et al (2000) Advances in Internal Medicine, 45 (1-40; Porche D J (1999) Nursing Clinics of North America, 34:95-112).

Inhibitors of HIV protease are useful to limit the establishment and progression of infection by therapeutic administration as well as in diagnostic assays for HIV. Protease inhibitor drugs approved by the FDA include:

-   -   saquinavir (Invirase®, Fortovase®, Hoffman-La Roche, EP-00432695         and EP-00432694)     -   ritonavir (Norvir®, Abbott Laboratories)     -   indinavir (Crixivan®, Merck & Co.)     -   nelfinavir (Viracept®, Pfizer)     -   amprenavir (Agenerase®, GlaxoSmithKline, Vertex Pharmaceuticals)     -   lopinavir/ritonavir (Kaletra®, Abbott Laboratories)

Experimental protease inhibitor drugs include:

-   -   fosamprenavir (GlaxoSmithKline, Vertex Pharmaceuticals)     -   tipranavir (Boehringer Ingelheim)     -   atazanavir (Bristol-Myers Squibb).

There is a need for anti-HIV therapeutic agents, i.e. drugs having improved antiviral and pharmacokinetic properties with enhanced activity against development of HIV resistance, improved oral bioavailability, greater potency and extended effective half-life in vivo. New HIV antivirals should be active against mutant HIV strains, have distinct resistance profiles, fewer side effects, less complicated dosing schedules, and orally active. In particular, there is a need for a less onerous dosage regimen, such as one pill, once per day. Although drugs targeting HIV RT are in wide use and have shown effectiveness, particularly when employed in combination, toxicity and development of resistant strains have limited their usefulness.

Combination therapy of HIV antivirals has proven to be highly effective in suppressing viral replication to unquantifiable levels for a sustained period of time. Also, combination therapy with RT and other HIV inhibitors have shown synergistic effects in suppressing HIV replication. Unfortunately, many patients currently fail combination therapy due to the development of drug resistance, non-compliance with complicated dosing regimens, pharmacokinetic interactions, toxicity, and lack of potency. Therefore, there is a need for new HIV RT inhibitors that are synergistic in combination with other HIV inhibitors.

Improving the delivery of drugs and other agents to target cells and tissues has been the focus of considerable research for many years. Though many attempts have been made to develop effective methods for importing biologically active molecules into cells, both in vivo and in vitro, none has proved to be entirely satisfactory. Optimizing the association of the inhibitory drug with its intracellular target, while minimizing intercellular redistribution of the drug, e.g. to neighboring cells, is often difficult or inefficient.

Most agents currently administered to a patient parenterally are not targeted, resulting in systemic delivery of the agent to cells and tissues of the body where it is unnecessary, and often undesirable. This may result in adverse drug side effects, and often limits the dose of a drug (e.g., cytotoxic agents and other anti-cancer or anti-viral drugs) that can be administered. By comparison, although oral administration of drugs is generally recognized as a convenient and economical method of administration, oral administration can result in either (a) uptake of the drug through the cellular and tissue barriers, e.g. blood/brain, epithelial, cell membrane, resulting in undesirable systemic distribution, or (b) temporary residence of the drug within the gastrointestinal tract. Accordingly, a major goal has been to develop methods for specifically targeting agents to cells and tissues. Benefits of such treatment includes avoiding the general physiological effects of inappropriate delivery of such agents to other cells and tissues, such as uninfected cells. Intracellular targeting may be achieved by methods and compositions which allow accumulation or retention of biologically active agents inside cells.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides novel compounds with HIV activity, i.e. novel human retroviral RT inhibitors. Therefore, the compounds of the invention may inhibit retroviral RT and thus inhibit the replication of the virus. They are useful for treating human patients infected with a human retrovirus, such as human immunodeficiency virus (strains of HIV-1 or HIV-2) or human T-cell leukemia viruses (HTLV-I or HTLV-II) which results in acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) and/or related diseases. The present invention includes novel phosphonate HIV RT inhibitor compounds and phosphonate analogs of known approved and experimental protease inhibitors. The compounds of the invention optionally provide cellular accumulation as set forth below.

The present invention relates generally to the accumulation or retention of therapeutic compounds inside cells. The invention is more particularly related to attaining high concentrations of phosphonate-containing molecules in HIV infected cells. Intracellular targeting may be achieved by methods and compositions which allow accumulation or retention of biologically active agents inside cells. Such effective targeting may be applicable to a variety of therapeutic formulations and procedures.

Compositions of the invention include new RT compounds having at least one phosphonate group. The invention includes all known approved and experimental protease inhibitors with at least one phosphonate group.

In one aspect, the invention includes compounds; including enantiomers thereof, of Formula 1A, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof,

wherein:

A⁰ is A¹, A², or A³; A¹ is

A² is

A³ is:

Y¹ is independently O, S, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), or N(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

Y² is independently a bond, Y³, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —S(O)_(M2)—, or —S(O)_(M2)—S(O)_(M2)—;

Y³ is O, S(O)_(M2), S, or C(R²)₂;

R^(x) is independently H, R¹, R², W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein:

R^(y) is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group;

R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms;

R² and R^(2a) are independently H, R¹, R³, or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or, when taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

R³ is R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), or R^(3e), provided that when R³ is bound to a heteroatom, then R³ is R^(3c) or R^(3d);

R^(3a) is R^(3e), —CN, N₃ or —NO₂;

R^(3b) is (═Y¹);

R^(3c) is -R^(x), —N(R^(x))(R^(x)), —SR^(x), —S(O)R^(x), —S(O)₂R^(x), —S(O)(OR^(x)), —S(O)₂(OR^(x)), —OC(Y¹)R^(x), —OC(Y¹)OR^(x), —OC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —SC(Y¹)R^(x), —SC(Y¹)OR^(x), —SC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), N(R^(x))C(Y¹)R^(x), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)OR^(x), or —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R^(3d) is —C(Y)R^(x), —C(Y¹)OR^(x) or —C(Y)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R^(3c) is F, Cl, Br or I;

R⁴ is an alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms;

R⁵ is H or R⁴, wherein each R⁴ is substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

W³ is W⁴ or W⁵;

W⁴ is R⁵, —C(Y¹)R⁵, —C(Y¹)W⁵, —SO_(M2)R⁵, or —SO_(M2)W⁵;

W⁵ is carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W⁵ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups;

W⁶ is W³ independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 A³ groups;

M2 is 0, 1 or 2;

M12a is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M12b is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M1a, M1c, and M1d are independently 0 or 1; and

M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

provided that the compound of Formula 1A is not of the structure 556-E.6

or its ethyl diester.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

Reference will now be made in detail to certain embodiments of the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying structures and formulas. While the invention will be described in conjunction with the enumerated embodiments, it will be understood that they are not intended to limit the invention to those embodiments. On the contrary, the invention is intended to cover all alternatives, modifications, and equivalents, which may be included within the scope of the present invention as defined by the embodiments.

DEFINITIONS

Unless stated otherwise, the following terms and phrases as used herein are intended to have the following meanings:

When tradenames are used herein, applicants intend to independently include the tradename product and the active pharmaceutical ingredient(s) of the tradename product.

“Base” is a term of art in the nucleoside and nucleotide fields. It is frequently abbreviated as “B.” Within the context of the present invention, “Base” or “B” mean, without limitation, at least those bases know to the ordinary artisan or taught in the art. Exemplary definitions 1) to 10) below are illustrative. Preferable “Bases” or “Bs” include purines, more preferably purines of 1) to 10) below. More preferably yet, “Base” or “B” means the purines of 4) to 10) below. Most preferably “Base” or “B” means 10) below.

In embodiments of this invention, Base or B is a group having structure (1) below

wherein

R^(2c) is halo, NH₂, R^(2b) or H;

R^(2b) is —(R⁹)_(m1)(X)_(m4)(R⁹)_(m2)(X)_(m5)(R⁹)_(m3)(N(R^(2c))₂)_(n);

X independently is O or S;

M1-m3 independently are 0-1;

M4-m5 independently are 0-1

n is 0-2;

R⁹ independently is unsubstituted C₁-C₁₅ alkyl, C₂-C₁₅ alkenyl, C₆-C₁₅ arylalkenyl, C₆-C₁₅ arylalkynyl, C₂-C₁₅ alkynyl, C₁-C₆-alkylamino-C₁-C₆ alkyl, C₅-C₁₅ aralkyl, C₆-C₁₅ heteroaralkyl, C₅-C₆ aryl or C₂-C₆ heterocycloalkyl, or said groups optionally substituted with 1 to 3 of halo, alkoxy, alkylthio, nitro, OH, ═O, haloalkyl, CN, R¹⁰ or N₃;

R¹⁰ independently is selected from the group consisting of H,

-   -   C₁-C₁₅ alkyl, C₂-C₁₅ alkenyl, C₆-C₁₅ arylalkenyl, C₆-C₁₅         arylalkynyl, C₂-C₁₅ alkynyl, C₁-C₆-alkylamino-C₁-C₆ alkyl,         C₅-C₁₅ aralkyl, C₆-C₁₅ heteroaralkyl, C₅-C₆ aryl, —C(O)R⁹,         —C(O)OR⁹ and C₂-C₆ heterocycloalkyl,     -   optionally both R¹⁰ of N(R¹⁰)₂ are joined together with N to         form a saturated or unsaturated C₅-C₆ heterocycle containing one         or two N heteroatoms and optionally an additional O or S         heteroatom,     -   and the foregoing R¹⁰ groups which are substituted with 1 to 3         of halo, alkoxy, alkythio, nitro, OH, ═O, haloalkyl, CN or N₃;         and

Z is N or C(R3), provided that the heterocyclic nucleus varies from purine by no more than two Z.

Alkyl, alkynyl and alkenyl groups in the formula (1) groups are normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic.

Ordinarily, n is 1, m1 is 0 or 1, R⁹ is C1-C3 alkyl, R^(2b) is H, m2-m5 are all 0; one or two R¹⁰ groups are not H; R¹⁰ is C₁-C₆ alkyl (including C₃-C₆ cycloalkyl, particularly cyclopropyl), and one R¹⁰ is H. If Z is C(R3) at the 5 and/or 7 positions, R³ is halo, usually fluoro.

The compounds of this invention are noteworthy in their ability to act effectively against HIV which bears resistance mutations in the polymerase gene, in particular, HIV which is resistant to tenofovir, FTC and other established anti-HIV agents.

1) B is a Heterocyclic Amine Base.

In the specification “Heterocyclic amine base” is defined as a monocyclic, bicyclic, or polycyclic ring system comprising one or more nitrogens. For example, B includes the naturally-occurring heterocycles found in nucleic acids, nucleotides and nucleosides, and analogs thereof.

2) B is Selected from the Group Consisting of

wherein:

U, G, and J are each independently CH or N;

D is N, CH, C—CN, C—NO₂, C—C₁₋₃alkyl, C—NHCONH₂, C—CONT₁₁T₁₁, C—CSNT₁₁T₁₁, C—COOT₁₁, C—C(═NH)NH₂, C-hydroxy, C—C₁₋₃ alkoxy, C-amino, C—C₁₋₄alkylamino, C-di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino, C-halogen, C-(1,3-oxazol-2-yl), C-(1,3thiazol-2-yl), or C-(imidazol-2-yl); wherein alkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to three groups independently selected from halogen, amino, hydroxy, carboxy, and C₁₋₃ alkoxy;

E is N or CT₅;

W is O or S;

T₁ is H, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkylamino, CF₃, or halogen;

T₂ is H, OH, SH, NH₂, C₁₋₄alkylamino, di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino, C₃₋₆ cycloalkylamino, halo, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, or CF₃;

T₃ is H, amino, C₁₋₄alkylamino, C₃₋₆ cycloalkylamino, or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino;

T₄ is H, halo, CN, carboxy, C₁₋₄alkyloxycarbonyl, N₃, amino, C₁₋₄alkylamino, di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino, hydroxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkylthio, C₁₋₆alkylsulfonyl, or (C₁₋₄alkyl)₀₋₂aminomethyl;

T₅ is independently H or C₁₋₆alkyl; and

T₆ is H, CF₃, C₁₋₄alkyl, amino, C₁₋₄alkylamino, C₃₋₆cycloalkylamino, or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino;

3). B is Selected from

wherein:

T₁₀ is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, OT₁₇, SH, ST₁₇, NH₂, or NHT₁₈;

T₁₁ is N, CF, CCl, CBr, CI, CT₁₉, CST₁₉, or COT₁₉;

T₁₂ is N or CH;

T₁₃ is N, CH, CCN, CCF₃, CC≡≡CH or CC(O)NH₂;

T₁₄ is H, OH, NH₂, SH, SCH₃, SCH₂CH₃, SCH₂C≡CH, SCH₂CH═CH₂, SC₃H₇, NH(CH₃), N(CH₃)₂, NH(CH₂CH₃), N(CH₂CH₃)₂, NH(CH₂C≡CH), NH(CH₂ CH═CH₂), NH(C₃H₇) or halogen (F, Cl, Br or I);

T₁₅ is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, SCH₃, SCH₂CH₃, SCH₂C≡CH, SCH₂CH═CH₂, SC₃H₇, OT₁₇, NH₂, or NHT₁₈; and

T₁₆ is O, S or Se.

T₁₇ is C₁₋₆alkyl (including CH₃, CH₂CH₃, CH₂C≡CH, CH₂CH═CH₂, and C₃H₇);

T₁₈ is C₁₋₆alkyl (including CH₃, CH₂CH₃, CH₂C≡CH, CH₂CH═CH₂, and C₃H₇);

T₁₉ is H, C₁₋₉alkyl, C₂₋₉alkenyl, C₂₋₉alkynyl or C₇₋₉aryl-alkyl unsubstituted or substituted by OH, O, N, F, Cl, Br or I (including CH₃, CH₂CH₃, CH═CH₂, CH═CHBr, CH₂CH₂Cl, CH₂CH₂F, CH₂C≡CH, CH₂CH═CH₂, C₃H₇, CH₂OH, CH₂OCH₃, CH₂OC₂H₅, CH₂OC≡CH, CH₂OCH₂CH═CH₂, CH₂C₃H₇, CH₂CH₂OH, CH₂CH₂OCH₃, CH₂CH₂OC₂H₅, CH₂CH₂OC≡CH, CH₂CH₂OCH₂CH═CH₂, CH₂CH₂OC₃H₇;

4) B is adenine, guanine, cytosine, uracil, thymine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaadenine, inosine, nebularine, nitropyrrole, nitroindole, 2-aminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, hypoxanthine, pseudouridine, pseudocytosine, pseudoisocytosine, 5-propynylcytosine, isocytosine, isoguanine, 7-deazaguanine, 2-thiopyrimidine, 6-thioguanine, 4-thiothymine, 4-thiouracil, O⁶-methylguanine, N⁶-methyladenine, O⁴-methylthymine, 5,6-dihydrothymine, 5,6-dihydrouracil, 4-methylindole, or pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidine;

5) B is

hypoxanthine,

inosine,

thymine,

uracil,

xanthine,

an 8-aza derivative of 2-aminopurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, hypoxanthine, inosine or xanthine;

a 7-deaza-8-aza derivative of adenine, guanine, 2-aminopurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, hypoxanthine, inosine or xanthine;

a 1-deaza derivative of 2-aminopurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, hypoxanthine, inosine or xanthine;

a 7-deaza derivative of 2-aminopurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, hypoxanthine, inosine or xanthine;

a 3-deaza derivatives of 2-aminopurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, hypoxanthine, inosine or xanthine;

6-azacytosine;

5-fluorocytosine,

5-chlorocytosine;

5-iodocytosine;

5-bromocytosine;

5-methylcytosine;

5-bromovinyluracil;

5-fluorouracil;

5-chlorouracil;

5-iodouracil;

5-bromouracil;

5-trifluoromethyluracil;

5-methoxymethyluracil;

5-ethynyluracil; or

5-propynyluracil

6) B is a guanyl, 3-deazaguanyl, 1-deazaguanyl, 8-azaguanyl, 7-deazaguanyl, adenyl, 3-deazaadenyl, 1-dezazadenyl, 8-azaadenyl, 7-deazaadenyl, 2,6-diaminopurinyl, 2-aminopurinyl, 6-chloro-2-aminopurinyl 6-thio-2-aminopurinyl, cytosinyl, 5-halocytosinyl, or 5-(C₁-C₃alkyl)cytosinyl.

7) B is

wherein T⁷ and T⁸ are each independently O or S and T⁹ is H, amino, hydroxy, Cl, or Br. 8) B is thymine, adenine, uracil, a 5-halouracil, a 5-alkyluracil, guanine, cytosine, a 5-halocytosine, a 5-alkylcytosine, or 2,6-diaminopurine. 9) B is guanine, cytosine, uracil, or thymine. 10) B is adenine.

“Bioavailability” is the degree to which the pharmaceutically active agent becomes available to the target tissue after the agent's introduction into the body. Enhancement of the bioavailability of a pharmaceutically active agent can provide a more efficient and effective treatment for patients because, for a given dose, more of the pharmaceutically active agent will be available at the targeted tissue sites.

The terms “phosphonate” and “phosphonate group” include functional groups or moieties within a molecule that comprises a phosphorous that is 1) single-bonded to a carbon, 2) double-bonded to a heteroatom, 3) single-bonded to a heteroatom, and 4) single-bonded to another heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom can be the same or different. The terms “phosphonate” and “phosphonate group” also include functional groups or moieties that comprise a phosphorous in the same oxidation state as the phosphorous described above, as well as functional groups or moieties that comprise a prodrug moiety that can separate from a compound so that the compound retains a phosphorous having the characteriatics described above. For example, the terms “phosphonate” and “phosphonate group” include phosphonic acid, phosphonic monoester, phosphonic diester, phosphonamidate, and phosphonthioate functional groups. In one specific embodiment of the invention, the terms “phosphonate” and “phosphonate group” include functional groups or moieties within a molecule that comprises a phosphorous that is 1) single-bonded to a carbon, 2) double-bonded to an oxygen, 3) single-bonded to an oxygen, and 4) single-bonded to another oxygen, as well as functional groups or moieties that comprise a prodrug moiety that can separate from a compound so that the compound retains a phosphorous having such characteriatics. In another specific embodiment of the invention, the terms “phosphonate” and “phosphonate group” include functional groups or moieties within a molecule that comprises a phosphorous that is 1) single-bonded to a carbon, 2) double-bonded to an oxygen, 3) single-bonded to an oxygen or nitrogen, and 4) single-bonded to another oxygen or nitrogen, as well as functional groups or moieties that comprise a prodrug moiety that can separate from a compound so that the compound retains a phosphorous having such characteriatics.

The term “prodrug” as used herein refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates the drug substance, i.e. active ingredient, as a result of spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalyzed chemical reaction(s), photolysis, and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s). A prodrug is thus a covalently modified analog or latent form of a therapeutically-active compound.

“Prodrug moiety” refers to a labile functional group which separates from the active inhibitory compound during metabolism, systemically, inside a cell, by hydrolysis, enzymatic cleavage, or by some other process (Bundgaard, Hans, “Design and Application of Prodrugs” in A Textbook of Drug Design and Development (1991), P. Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Eds. Harwood Academic Publishers, pp. 113-191). Enzymes which are capable of an enzymatic activation mechanism with the phosphonate prodrug compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, amidases, esterases, microbial enzymes, phospholipases, cholinesterases, and phosphases. Prodrug moieties can serve to enhance solubility, absorption and lipophilicity to optimize drug delivery, bioavailability and efficacy. A prodrug moiety may include an active metabolite or drug itself.

Exemplary prodrug moieties include the hydrolytically sensitive or labile acyloxymethyl esters —CH₂C(═O)R⁹ and acyloxymethyl carbonates —CH₂C(═O)OR⁹ where R⁹ is C₁-C₆ alkyl, C₁-C₆ substituted alkyl, C₆-C₂₀ aryl or C₆-C₂₀ substituted aryl. The acyloxyalkyl ester was first used as a prodrug strategy for carboxylic acids and then applied to phosphates and phosphonates by Farquhar et al. (1983) J. Pharm. Sci. 72: 324; also U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,816,570, 4,968,788, 5,663,159 and 5,792,756. Subsequently, the acyloxyalkyl ester was used to deliver phosphonic acids across cell membranes and to enhance oral bioavailability. A close variant of the acyloxyalkyl ester, the alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl ester (carbonate), may also enhance oral bioavailability as a prodrug moiety in the compounds of the combinations of the invention. An exemplary acyloxymethyl ester is pivaloyloxymethoxy, (POM) —CH₂C(═O)C(CH₃)₃. An exemplary acyloxymethyl carbonate prodrug moiety is pivaloyloxymethylcarbonate (POC) —CH₂C(═O)OC(CH₃)₃.

The phosphonate group may be a phosphonate prodrug moiety. The prodrug moiety may be sensitive to hydrolysis, such as, but not limited to a pivaloyloxymethyl carbonate (POC) or POM group. Alternatively, the prodrug moiety may be sensitive to enzymatic potentiated cleavage, such as a lactate ester or a phosphonamidate-ester group.

Aryl esters of phosphorus groups, especially phenyl esters, are reported to enhance oral bioavailability (De Lombaert et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37: 498). Phenyl esters containing a carboxylic ester ortho to the phosphate have also been described (Khamnei and Torrence, (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39:4109-4115). Benzyl esters are reported to generate the parent phosphonic acid. In some cases, substituents at the ortho- or para-position may accelerate the hydrolysis. Benzyl analogs with an acylated phenol or an alkylated phenol may generate the phenolic compound through the action of enzymes, e.g., esterases, oxidases, etc., which in turn undergoes cleavage at the benzylic C—O bond to generate the phosphoric acid and the quinone methide intermediate. Examples of this class of prodrugs are described by Mitchell et al. (1992) J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. II 2345; Glazier WO 91/19721. Still other benzylic prodrugs have been described containing a carboxylic ester-containing group attached to the benzylic methylene (Glazier WO 91/19721). Thio-containing prodrugs are reported to be useful for the intracellular delivery of phosphonate drugs. These proesters contain an ethylthio group in which the thiol group is either esterified with an acyl group or combined with another thiol group to form a disulfide. Deesterification or reduction of the disulfide generates the free thio intermediate which subsequently breaks down to the phosphoric acid and episulfide (Puech et al. (1993) Antiviral Res., 22: 155-174; Benzaria et al. (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39: 4958). Cyclic phosphonate esters have also been described as prodrugs of phosphorus-containing compounds (Erion et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,312,662).

“Protecting group” refers to a moiety of a compound that masks or alters the properties of a functional group or the properties of the compound as a whole. Chemical protecting groups and strategies for protection/deprotection are well known in the art. See e.g., Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, Theodora W. Greene, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1991. Protecting groups are often utilized to mask the reactivity of certain functional groups, to assist in the efficiency of desired chemical reactions, e.g., making and breaking chemical bonds in an ordered and planned fashion. Protection of functional groups of a compound alters other physical properties besides the reactivity of the protected functional group, such as the polarity, lipophilicity (hydrophobicity), and other properties which can be measured by common analytical tools. Chemically protected intermediates may themselves be biologically active or inactive.

Protected compounds may also exhibit altered, and in some cases, optimized properties in vitro and in vivo, such as passage through cellular membranes and resistance to enzymatic degradation or sequestration. In this role, protected compounds with intended therapeutic effects may be referred to as prodrugs. Another function of a protecting group is to convert the parental drug into a prodrug, whereby the parental drug is released upon conversion of the prodrug in vivo. Because active prodrugs may be absorbed more effectively than the parental drug, prodrugs may possess greater potency in vivo than the parental drug. Protecting groups are removed either in vitro, in the instance of chemical intermediates, or in vivo, in the case of prodrugs. With chemical intermediates, it is not particularly important that the resulting products after deprotection, e.g., alcohols, be physiologically acceptable, although in general it is more desirable if the products are pharmacologically innocuous.

Any reference to any of the compounds of the invention also includes a reference to a physiologically acceptable salt thereof. Examples of physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention include salts derived from an appropriate base, such as an alkali metal (for example, sodium), an alkaline earth (for example, magnesium), ammonium and NX₄ ⁺ (wherein X is C₁-C₄ alkyl). Physiologically acceptable salts of an hydrogen atom or an amino group include salts of organic carboxylic acids such as acetic, benzoic, lactic, fumaric, tartaric, maleic, malonic, malic, isethionic, lactobionic and succinic acids; organic sulfonic acids, such as methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic and p-toluenesulfonic acids; and inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, sulfuric, phosphoric and sulfamic acids. Physiologically acceptable salts of a compound of an hydroxy group include the anion of said compound in combination with a suitable cation such as Na⁺ and NX₄ ⁺ (wherein X is independently selected from H or a C₁-C₄ alkyl group).

For therapeutic use, salts of active ingredients of the compounds of the invention will be physiologically acceptable, i.e. they will be salts derived from a physiologically acceptable acid or base. However, salts of acids or bases which are not physiologically acceptable may also find use, for example, in the preparation or purification of a physiologically acceptable compound. All salts, whether or not derived form a physiologically acceptable acid or base, are within the scope of the present invention.

“Alkyl” is C₁-C₁₈ hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms. Examples are methyl (Me, —CH₃), ethyl (Et, —CH₂CH₃), 1-propyl (n-Pr, n-propyl, —CH₂CH₂CH₃), 2-propyl (i-Pr, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)₂), 1-butyl (n-Bu, n-butyl, —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₃), 2-methyl-1-propyl (i-Bu, i-butyl, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂), 2-butyl (s-Bu, s-butyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃), 2-methyl-2-propyl (t-Bu, t-butyl, —C(CH₃)₃), 1-pentyl (n-pentyl, —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₃), 2-pentyl (—CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃), 3-pentyl (—CH(CH₂CH₃)₂), 2-methyl-2-butyl (—C(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃), 3-methyl-2-butyl (—CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂), 3-methyl-1-butyl (—CH₂CH₂CH(CH₃)₂), 2-methyl-1-butyl (—CH₂CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃), 1-hexyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₃), 2-hexyl (—CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₃), 3-hexyl (—CH(CH₂CH₃)(CH₂CH₂CH₃)), 2-methyl-2-pentyl (—C(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₂CH₃), 3-methyl-2-pentyl (—CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃), 4-methyl-2-pentyl (—CH(CH₃)CH₂CH(CH₃)₂), 3-methyl-3-pentyl (—C(CH₃)(CH₂CH₃)₂), 2-methyl-3-pentyl (—CH(CH₂CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂), 2,3-dimethyl-2-butyl (—C(CH₃)₂CH(CH₃)₂), 3,3-dimethyl-2-butyl (—CH(CH₃)C(CH₃)₃.

“Alkenyl” is C₂-C₁₈ hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp² double bond. Examples include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl (—CH═CH₂), allyl (—CH₂CH═CH₂), cycloperitenyl (—C₅H₇), and 5-hexenyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH—CH₂).

“Alkynyl” is C₂-C₁₈ hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp triple bond. Examples include, but are not limited to, acetylenic (—C≡CH) and propargyl (—CH₂C≡CH),

“Alkylene” refers to a saturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 1-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkane. Typical alkylene radicals include, but are not limited to, methylene (—CH₂—) 1,2-ethyl (—CH₂CH₂—), 1,3-propyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂—), 1,4-butyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—), and the like.

“Alkenylene” refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 2-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkene. Typical alkenylene radicals include, but are not limited to, 1,2-ethylene (—CH═CH—).

“Alkynylene” refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 2-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkyne. Typical alkynylene radicals include, but are not limited to, acetylene (—C≡C—), propargyl (—CH₂C≡C—), and 4-pentynyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂C≡CH—).

“Aryl” means a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon radical of 6-20 carbon atoms derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, radicals derived from benzene, substituted benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, biphenyl, and the like.

“Arylalkyl” refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp³ carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical. Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-1-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-1-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-1-yl and the like. The arylalkyl group comprises 6 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl moiety, including alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl groups, of the arylalkyl group is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 5 to 14 carbon atoms.

“Substituted alkyl”, “substituted aryl”, and “substituted arylalkyl” mean alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl respectively, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a non-hydrogen substituent. Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, -X, -R, —O—, —OR, —SR, —S⁻, —NR₂, —NR₃, ═NR, —CX₃, —CN, —OCN, —SCN, —N═C═O, —NCS, —NO, —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, NC(═O)R, —C(═O)R, —C(═O)NRR—S(═O)₂O⁻, —S(═O)₂OH, —S(═O)R, —OS(═O)₂OR, —S(═O)₂NR, —S(═O)R, —OP(═O)O₂RR, —P(═O)O₂RR—P(═O)(O—)₂, —P(═O)(OH)₂, —C(═O)R, —C(═O)X, —C(S)R, —C(O)OR, —C(O)O⁻, —C(S)OR, —C(O)SR, —C(S)SR, —C(O)NRR, —C(S)NRR, —C(NR)NRR, where each X is independently a halogen: F, Cl, Br, or I; and each R is independently —H, alkyl, aryl, heterocycle, protecting group or prodrug moiety. Alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups may also be similarly substituted.

“Heterocycle” as used herein includes by way of example and not limitation these heterocycles described in Paquette, Leo A.; Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry (W. A. Benjamin, New York, 1968), particularly Chapters 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9; The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds, A Series of Monographs” (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1950 to present), in particular Volumes 13, 14, 16, 19, and 28; and J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1960) 82:5566. In one specific embodiment of the invention “heterocycle” includes a “carbocycle” as defined herein, wherein one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom (e.g. O, N, or S).

Examples of heterocycles include by way of example and not limitation pyridyl, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, sulfur oxidized tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, azocinyl, triazinyl, 6H-1,2,5-thiadiazinyl, 2H,6H-1,5,2-dithiazinyl, thienyl, thianthrenyl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathinyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazoly, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, β-carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, phenoxazinyl, isochromanyl, chromanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, quinuclidinyl, morpholinyl, oxazolidinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, oxindolyl, benzoxazolinyl, isatinoyl, and bis-tetrahydrofuranyl:

By way of example and not limitation, carbon bonded heterocycles are bonded at position 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridine, position 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridazine, position 2, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyrimidine, position 2, 3, 5, or 6 of a pyrazine, position 2, 3, 4, or 5 of a furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiofuran, thiophene, pyrrole or tetrahydropyrrole, position 2, 4, or 5 of an oxazole, imidazole or thiazole, position 3, 4, or 5 of an isoxazole, pyrazole, or isothiazole, position 2 or 3 of an aziridine, position 2, 3, or 4 of an azetidine, position 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of a quinoline or position 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of an isoquinoline. Still more typically, carbon bonded heterocycles include 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 5-pyridyl, 6-pyridyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl, 5-pyridazinyl, 6-pyridazinyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, 6-pyrimidinyl, 2-pyrazinyl, 3-pyrazinyl, 5-pyrazinyl, 6-pyrazinyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, or 5-thiazolyl.

By way of example and not limitation, nitrogen bonded heterocycles are bonded at position 1 of an aziridine, azetidine, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, 2-pyrroline, 3-pyrroline, imidazole, imidazolidine, 2-imidazoline, 3-imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indole, indoline, 1H-indazole, position 2 of a isoindole, or isoindoline, position 4 of a morpholine, and position 9 of a carbazole, or β-carboline. Still more typically, nitrogen bonded heterocycles include 1-aziridyl, 1-azetedyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, and 1-piperidinyl.

“Carbocycle” refers to a saturated, unsaturated or aromatic ring having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle, 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle, and up to about 20 carbon atoms as a polycycle. Monocyclic carbocycles have 3 to 6 ring atoms, still more typically 5 or 6 ring atoms. Bicyclic carbocycles have 7 to 12 ring atoms, e.g., arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6] or [6,6] system, or 9 or 10 ring atoms arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system. Examples of monocyclic carbocycles include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-1-enyl, 1-cyclopent-2-enyl, 1-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-1-enyl, 1-cyclohex-2-enyl, 1-cyclohex-3-enyl, phenyl, spiryl and naphthyl.

“Linker” or “link” refers to a chemical moiety comprising a covalent bond or a chain or group of atoms that covalently attaches a phosphonate group to a drug. Linkers include portions of substituents A¹ and A³, which include moieties such as: repeating units of alkyloxy (e.g., polyethylenoxy, PEG, polymethyleneoxy) and alkylamino (e.g., polyethyleneamino, Jeffamine™); and diacid ester and amides including succinate, succinamide, diglycolate, malonate, and caproamide.

The term “chiral” refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.

The term “stereoisomers” refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.

“Diastereomer” refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g., melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.

“Enantiomers” refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.

The term “treatment” or “treating,” to the extent it relates to a disease or condition includes preventing the disease or condition from occurring, inhibiting the disease or condition, eliminating the disease or condition, and/or relieving one or more symptoms of the disease or condition.

Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds (1994) John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and l or (+) and (−) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (−) or l meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms “racemic mixture” and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.

Protecting Groups

In the context of the present invention, protecting groups include prodrug moieties and chemical protecting groups.

Protecting groups are available, commonly known and used, and are optionally used to prevent side reactions with the protected group during synthetic procedures, i.e. routes or methods to prepare the compounds of the invention. For the most part the decision as to which groups to protect, when to do so, and the nature of the chemical protecting group “PG” will be dependent upon the chemistry of the reaction to be protected against (e.g., acidic, basic, oxidative, reductive or other conditions) and the intended direction of the synthesis. The PG groups do not need to be, and generally are not, the same if the compound is substituted with multiple PG. In general, PG will be used to protect functional groups such as carboxyl, hydroxyl, thio, or amino groups and to thus prevent side reactions or to otherwise facilitate the synthetic efficiency. The order of deprotection to yield free, deprotected groups is dependent upon the intended direction of the synthesis and the reaction conditions to be encountered, and may occur in any order as determined by the artisan.

Various functional groups of the compounds of the invention may be protected. For example, protecting groups for —OH groups (whether hydroxyl, carboxylic acid, phosphonic acid, or other functions) include “ether- or ester-forming groups”. Ether- or ester-forming groups are capable of functioning as chemical protecting groups in the synthetic schemes set forth herein. However, some hydroxyl and thio protecting groups are neither ether- nor ester-forming groups, as will be understood by those skilled in the art, and are included with amides, discussed below.

A very large number of hydroxyl protecting groups and amide-forming groups and corresponding chemical cleavage reactions are described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Theodora W. Greene (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New. York, 1991, ISBN 0-471-62301-6) (“Greene”). See also Kocienski, Philip J.; Protecting Groups

(Georg Thieme Verlag Stuttgart, New York, 1994), which is incorporated by reference in its entirety herein. In particular Chapter 1, Protecting Groups: An Overview, pages 1-20, Chapter 2, Hydroxyl Protecting Groups, pages 21-94, Chapter 3, Diol Protecting Groups, pages 95-117, Chapter 4, Carboxyl Protecting Groups, pages 118-154, Chapter 5, Carbonyl Protecting Groups, pages 155-184. For protecting groups for carboxylic acid, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, sulfonic acid and other protecting groups for acids see Greene as set forth below. Such groups include by way of example and not limitation, esters, amides, hydrazides, and the like.

Ether- and Ester-Forming Protecting Groups

Ester-forming groups include: (1) phosphonate ester-forming groups, such as phosphonamidate esters, phosphorothioate esters, phosphonate esters, and phosphon-bis-amidates; (2) carboxyl ester-forming groups, and (3) sulphur ester-forming groups, such as sulphonate, sulfate, and sulfinate.

The optional phosphonate moieties of the compounds of the invention may or may not be prodrug moieties, i.e. they may or may be susceptible to hydrolytic or enzymatic cleavage or modification. Certain phosphonate moieties are stable under most or nearly all metabolic conditions. For example, a dialkylphosphonate, where the alkyl groups are two or more carbons, may have appreciable stability in vivo due to a slow rate of hydrolysis.

Within the context of phosphonate prodrug moieties, a large number of structurally-diverse prodrugs have been described for phosphonic acids (Freeman and Ross in Progress in Medicinal Chemistry 34: 112-147 (1997) and are included within the scope of the present invention. An exemplary phosphonate ester-forming group is the phenyl carbocycle in substructure A₃ having the formula:

wherein R₁ may be H or C₁-C₁₂ alkyl; m1 is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8, and the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0 to 3 R₂ groups. Where Y₁ is O, a lactate ester is formed, and where Y₁ is N(R₂), N(OR₂) or N(N(R₂)₂, a phosphonamidate ester results.

In its ester-forming role, a protecting group typically is bound to any acidic group such as, by way of example and not limitation, a —CO₂H or —C(S)OH group, thereby resulting in —CO₂R^(x) where R^(x) is defined herein. Also, R^(x) for example includes the enumerated ester groups of WO 95/07920.

Examples of protecting groups, include:

C₃-C₁₂ heterocycle (described above) or aryl. These aromatic groups optionally are polycyclic or monocyclic. Examples include phenyl, spiryl, 2- and 3-pyrrolyl, 2- and 3-thienyl, 2- and 4-imidazolyl, 2-, 4- and 5-oxazolyl, 3- and 4-isoxazolyl, 2-, 4- and 5-thiazolyl, 3-, 4- and 5-isothiazolyl, 3- and 4-pyrazolyl, 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-pyridinyl, and 1-, 2-, 4- and 5-pyrimidinyl,

C₃-C₁₂ heterocycle or aryl substituted with halo, R¹, R¹—O—C₁-C₁₂ alkylene, C₁-C₁₂ alkoxy, CN, NO₂, OH, carboxy, carboxyester, thiol, thioester, C₁-C₁₂ haloalkyl (1-6 halogen atoms), C₂-C₁₂ alkenyl or C₂-C₁₂ alkynyl. Such groups include 2-, 3- and 4-alkoxyphenyl (C₁-C₁₂ alkyl), 2-, 3- and 4-methoxyphenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-ethoxyphenyl, 2,3-, 2,4-, 2,5-, 2,6-, 3,4- and 3,5-diethoxyphenyl, 2- and 3-carboethoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl, 2- and 3-ethoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl, 2- and 3-ethoxy-5-hydroxyphenyl, 2- and 3-ethoxy-6-hydroxyphenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-O-acetylphenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-dimethylaminophenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-methylmercaptophenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-halophenyl (including 2-, 3- and 4-fluorophenyl and 2-, 3- and 4-chlorophenyl), 2,3-, 2,4-, 2,5-, 2,6-, 3,4- and 3,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,3-, 2,4-, 2,5-, 2,6-, 3,4- and 3,5-biscarboxyethylphenyl, 2,3-, 2,4-, 2,5-, 2,6-, 3,4- and 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 2,3-, 2,4-, 2,5-, 2,6-, 3,4- and 3,5-dihalophenyl (including 2,4-difluorophenyl and 3,5-difluorophenyl), 2-, 3- and 4-haloalkylphenyl (1 to 5 halogen atoms, C₁-C₁₂ alkyl including 4-trifluoromethylphenyl), 2-, 3- and 4-cyanophenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-nitrophenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-haloalkylbenzyl (1 to 5 halogen atoms, C₁-C₁₂ alkyl including 4-trifluoromethylbenzyl and 2-, 3- and 4-trichloromethylphenyl and 2-, 3- and 4-trichloromethylphenyl), 4-N-methylpiperidinyl, 3-N-methylpiperidinyl, 1-ethylpiperazinyl, benzyl, alkylsalicylphenyl (C₁-C₄ alkyl, including 2-, 3- and 4-ethylsalicylphenyl), 2-,3- and 4-acetylphenyl, 1,8-dihydroxynaphthyl (—C₁₀H₆—OH) and aryloxy ethyl [C₆-C₉ aryl (including phenoxy ethyl)], 2,2′-dihydroxybiphenyl, 2-, 3- and 4-N,N-dialkylaminophenol, —C₆H₄CH₂—N(CH₃)₂, trimethoxybenzyl, triethoxybenzyl, 2-alkyl pyridinyl (C₁₋₄ alkyl);

C₈ esters of 2-carboxyphenyl; and C₁-C₄ alkylene-C₃-C₆ aryl (including benzyl, —CH₂-pyrrolyl, —CH₂-thienyl, —CH₂-imidazolyl, —CH₂-oxazolyl, —CH₂-isoxazolyl, —CH₂-thiazolyl, —CH₂-isothiazolyl, —CH₂-pyrazolyl, —CH₂-pyridinyl and —CH₂-pyrimidinyl) substituted in the aryl moiety by 3 to 5 halogen atoms or 1 to 2 atoms or groups selected from halogen, C₁-C₁₂ alkoxy (including methoxy and ethoxy), cyano, nitro, OH, C₁-C₁₂ haloalkyl (1 to 6 halogen atoms; including —CH₂CCl₃), C₁-C₁₂ alkyl (including methyl and ethyl), C₂-C₁₂ alkenyl or C₂-C₁₂ alkynyl; alkoxy ethyl [C₁-C₆ alkyl including —CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₃ (methoxy ethyl)]; alkyl substituted by any of the groups set forth above for aryl, in particular OH or by 1 to 3 halo atoms (including —CH₃, —CH(CH₃)₂, —C(CH₃)₃, —CH₂CH₃, —(CH₂)₂CH₃, —(CH₂)₃CH₃, —(CH₂)₄CH₃, —(CH₂)₅CH₃, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CH₂CF₃, and —CH₂CCl₃);

—N-2-propylmorpholino, 2,3-dihydro-6-hydroxyindene, sesamol, catechol monoester, —CH₂—C(O)—N(R¹)₂, —CH₂—S(O)(R¹), —CH₂—S(O)₂(R¹), —CH₂—CH(OC(O)CH₂R¹)—CH₂(OC(O)CH₂R¹), cholesteryl, enolpyruvate (HOOC—C(═CH₂)—), glycerol;

a 5 or 6 carbon monosaccharide, disaccharide or oligosaccharide (3 to 9 monosaccharide residues);

triglycerides such as α-D-β-diglycerides (wherein the fatty acids composing glyceride lipids generally are naturally occurring saturated or unsaturated C₆₋₂₆, C₆₋₁₈ or C₆₋₁₀ fatty acids such as linoleic, lauric, myristic, palmitic, stearic, oleic, palmitoleic, linolenic and the like fatty acids) linked to acyl of the parental compounds herein through a glyceryl oxygen of the triglyceride;

phospholipids linked to the carboxyl group through the phosphate of the phospholipid;

phthalidyl (shown in FIG. 1 of Clayton et al., Antimicrob. Agents Chemo. (1974) 5(6):670-671);

cyclic carbonates such as (5-R_(d)-2-oxo-1,3-dioxolen-4-yl)methyl esters (Sakamoto et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull. (1984) 32(6)2241-2248) where R_(d) is R¹, R⁴ or aryl; and

The hydroxyl groups of the compounds of this invention optionally are substituted with one of groups III, IV or V disclosed in WO 94/21604, or with isopropyl.

Table A lists examples of protecting group ester moieties that for example can be bonded via oxygen to —C(O)O— and —P(O)(O—)₂ groups. Several amidates also are shown, which are bound directly to —C(O)— or —P(O)₂. Esters of structures 1-5, 8-10 and 16, 17, 19-22 are synthesized by reacting the compound herein having a free hydroxyl with the corresponding halide (chloride or acyl chloride and the like) and N,N-dicyclohexyl-N-morpholine carboxamidine (or another base such as DBU, triethylamine, CsCO₃, N,N-dimethylaniline and the like) in DMF (or other solvent such as acetonitrile or N-methylpyrrolidone). When the compound to be protected is a phosphonate, the esters of structures 5-7, 11, 12, 21, and 23-26 are synthesized by reaction of the alcohol or alkoxide salt (or the corresponding amines in the case of compounds such as 13, 14 and 15) with the monochlorophosphonate or dichlorophosphonate (or another activated phosphonate).

TABLE A  1. —CH₂—C(O)—N(R₁)₂* 10. —CH₂—O—C(O)—C(CH₃)₃  2. —CH₂—S(O)(R₁) 11. —CH₂—CCl₃  3. —CH₂—S(O)₂(R₁) 12. —C₆H₅  4. —CH₂—O—C(O)—CH₂—C₆H₅ 13. —NH—CH₂—C(O)O—CH₂CH₃  5. 3-cholesteryl 14. —N(CH₃)—CH₂—C(O)O—CH₂CH₃  6. 3-pyridyl 15. —NHR₁  7. N-ethylmorpholino 16. —CH₂—O—C(O)—C₁₀H₁₅  8. —CH₂—O—C(O)—C₆H₅ 17. —CH₂—O—C(O)—CH(CH₃)₂  9. —CH₂—O—C(O)—CH₂CH₃ 18. —CH₂—C#H(OC(O)CH₂R₁)—CH₂— —(OC(O)CH₂R₁)* 19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

# - chiral center is (R), (S) or racemate.

Other esters that are suitable for use herein are described in EP 632048.

Protecting groups also includes “double ester” forming profunctionalities such

as —CH₂OC(O)OCH₃, —CH₂SCOCH₃, —CH₂OCON(CH₃)₂, or alkyl- or aryl-acyloxyalkyl groups of the structure —CH(R¹ or W⁵)O((CO)R³⁷) or —CH(R¹ or W⁵)((CO)OR³⁸) (linked to oxygen of the acidic group) wherein R³⁷ and R³⁸ are alkyl, aryl, or alkylaryl groups (see U.S. Pat. No. 4,968,788). Frequently R³⁷ and R³⁸ are bulky groups such as branched alkyl, ortho-substituted aryl, meta-substituted aryl, or combinations thereof, including normal, secondary, iso- and tertiary alkyls of 1-6 carbon atoms. An example is the pivaloyloxymethyl group. These are of particular use with prodrugs for oral administration. Examples of such useful protecting groups are alkylacyloxymethyl esters and their derivatives, including—CH(CH₂CH₂OCH₃)OC(O)C(CH₃)₃,

—CH₂OC(O)C₁₀H₁₅, —CH₂OC(O)C(CH₃)₃, —CH(CH₂OCH₃)OC(O)C(CH₃)₃, —CH(CH(CH₃)₂)OC(O)C(CH₃)₃, —CH₂OC(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂OC(O)C₆H₁₁, —CH₂OC(O)C₆H₅, —CH₂OC(O)C₁₀H₁₅, —CH₂OC(O)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂OC(O)CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂OC(O)C(CH₃)₃ and —CH₂OC(O)CH₂C₆H₅.

In some embodiments the protected acidic group is an ester of the acidic group and is the residue of a hydroxyl-containing functionality. In other embodiments, an amino compound is used to protect the acid functionality. The residues of suitable hydroxyl or amino-containing functionalities are set forth above or are found in WO 95/07920. Of particular interest are the residues of amino acids, amino acid esters, polypeptides, or aryl alcohols. Typical amino acid, polypeptide and carboxyl-esterified amino acid residues are described on pages 11-18 and related text of WO 95/07920 as groups L1 or L2. WO 95/07920 expressly teaches the amidates of phosphonic acids, but it will be understood that such amidates are formed with any of the acid groups set forth herein and the amino acid residues set forth in WO 95/07920.

Typical esters for protecting acidic functionalities are also described in WO 95/07920, again understanding that the same esters can be formed with the acidic groups herein as with the phosphonate of the '920 publication. Typical ester groups are defined at least on WO 95/07920 pages 89-93 (under R³¹ or R³⁵), the table on page 105, and pages 21-23 (as R). Of particular interest are esters of unsubstituted aryl such as phenyl or arylalkyl such benzyl, or hydroxy-, halo-, alkoxy-, carboxy- and/or alkylestercarboxy-substituted-aryl or alkylaryl, especially phenyl, ortho-ethoxyphenyl, or C₁-C₄ alkylestercarboxyphenyl (salicylate C₁-C₁₂ alkylesters).

The protected acidic groups, particularly when using the esters or amides of WO 95/07920, are useful as prodrugs for oral administration. However, it is not essential that the acidic group be protected in order for the compounds of this invention to be effectively administered by the oral route. When the compounds of the invention having protected groups, in particular amino acid amidates or substituted and unsubstituted aryl esters are administered systemically or orally they are capable of hydrolytic cleavage in vivo to yield the free acid.

One or more of the acidic hydroxyls are protected. If more than one acidic hydroxyl is protected then the same or a different protecting group is employed, e.g., the esters may be different or the same, or a mixed amidate and ester may be used.

Typical hydroxy protecting groups described in Greene (pages 14-118) include substituted methyl and alkyl ethers, substituted benzyl ethers, silyl ethers, esters including sulfonic acid esters, and carbonates. For example:

-   -   Ethers (methyl, t-butyl, allyl);     -   Substituted Methyl Ethers (Methoxymethyl, Methylthiomethyl,         t-Butylthiomethyl, (Phenyldimethylsilyl)methoxymethyl,         Benzyloxymethyl, p-Methoxybenzyloxymethyl,         (4-Methoxyphenoxy)methyl, Guaiacolmethyl, t-Butoxymethyl,         4-Pentenyloxymethyl, Siloxymethyl, 2-Methoxyethoxymethyl,         2,2,2-Trichloroethoxymethyl, Bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl,         2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, Tetrahydropyranyl,         3-Bromotetrahydropyranyl, Tetrahydropthiopyranyl,         1-Methoxycyclohexyl, 4-Methoxytetrahydropyranyl,         4-Methoxytetrahydrothiopyranyl, 4-Methoxytetrahydropthiopyranyl         S,S-Dioxido,         1-[(2-Chloro-4-methyl)phenyl]-4-methoxypiperidin-4-yl,         1,4-Dioxan-2-yl, Tetrahydrofuranyl, Tetrahydrothiofuranyl,         2,3,3a,4,5,6,7,7a-Octahydro-7,8,8-trimethyl-4,7-methanobenzofuran-2-yl));     -   Substituted Ethyl Ethers (1-Ethoxyethyl,         1-(2-Chloroethoxy)ethyl, 1-Methyl-1-methoxyethyl,         1-Methyl-1-benzyloxyethyl, 1-Methyl-1-benzyloxy-2-fluoroethyl,         2,2,2-Trichloroethyl, 2-Trimethylsilylethyl,         2-(Phenylselenyl)ethyl,     -   p-Chlorophenyl, p-Methoxyphenyl, 2,4-Dinitrophenyl, Benzyl);     -   Substituted Benzyl Ethers (p-Methoxybenzyl, 3,4-Dimethoxybenzyl,         o-Nitrobenzyl, p-Nitrobenzyl, p-Halobenzyl, 2,6-Dichlorobenzyl,         p-Cyanobenzyl, p-Phenylbenzyl, 2- and 4-Picolyl,         3-Methyl-2-picolyl N-Oxido, Diphenylmethyl,         p,p′-Dinitrobenzhydryl, 5-Dibenzosuberyl, Triphenylmethyl,         α-Naphthyldiphenylmethyl, p-methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl,         Di(p-methoxyphenyl)phenylmethyl, Tri(p-methoxyphenyl)methyl,         4-(4′-Bromophenacyloxy)phenyldiphenylmethyl,         4,4′,4″-Tris(4,5-dichlorophthalimidophenyl)methyl,         4,4′,4″-Tris(levulinoyloxyphenyl)methyl,         4,4′,4″-Tris(benzoyloxyphenyl)methyl,         3-(Imidazol-1-ylmethyl)bis(4′,4″-dimethoxyphenyl)methyl,         1,1-Bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-1′-pyrenylmethyl, 9-Anthryl,         9-(9-Phenyl)xanthenyl, 9-(9-Phenyl-10-oxo)anthryl,         1,3-Benzodithiolan-2-yl, Benzisothiazolyl S,S-Dioxido);     -   Silyl Ethers (Trimethylsilyl, Triethylsilyl, Triisopropylsilyl,         Dimethylisopropylsilyl, Diethylisopropylsilyl,         Dimethylthexylsilyl, t-Butyldimethylsilyl, t-Butyldiphenylsilyl,         Tribenzylsilyl, Tri-p-xylylsilyl, Triphenylsilyl,         Diphenylmethylsilyl, t-Butylmethoxyphenylsilyl);     -   Esters (Formate, Benzoylformate, Acetate, Choroacetate,         Dichloroacetate, Trichloroacetate, Trifluoroacetate,         Methoxyacetate, Triphenylmethoxyacetate, Phenoxyacetate,         p-Chlorophenoxyacetate, p-poly-Phenylacetate,         3-Phenylpropionate, 4-Oxopentanoate (Levulinate),         4,4-(Ethylenedithio)pentanoate, Pivaloate, Adamantoate,         Crotonate, 4-Methoxycrotonate, Benzoate, p-Phenylbenzoate,         2,4,6-Trimethylbenzoate (Mesitoate));     -   Carbonates (Methyl, 9-Fluorenylmethyl, Ethyl,         2,2,2-Trichloroethyl, 2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethyl,         2-(Phenylsulfonyl)ethyl, 2-(Triphenylphosphonio)ethyl, Isobutyl,         Vinyl, Allyl, p-Nitrophenyl, Benzyl, p-Methoxybenzyl,         3,4-Dimethoxybenzyl, o-Nitrobenzyl, p-Nitrobenzyl, S-Benzyl         Thiocarbonate, 4-Ethoxy-1-naphthyl, Methyl Dithiocarbonate);     -   Groups With Assisted Cleavage (2-Iodobenzoate, 4-Azidobutyrate,         4-Nitro-4-methylpentanoate, o-(Dibromomethyl)benzoate,         2-Formylbenzenesulfonate, 2-(Methylthiomethoxy)ethyl Carbonate,         4-(Methylthiomethoxy)butyrate,         2-(Methylthiomethoxymethyl)benzoate); Miscellaneous Esters         (2,6-Dichloro-4-methylphenoxyacetate, 2,6-Dichloro-4-(1,1,3,3         tetramethylbutyl)phenoxyacetate,         2,4-Bis(1,1-dimethylpropyl)phenoxyacetate,         Chlorodiphenylacetate, Isobutyrate, Monosuccinate,         (E)-2-Methyl-2-butenoate (Tigloate),         o-(Methoxycarbonyl)benzoate, p-poly-Benzoate, α-Naphthoate,         Nitrate, Alkyl N,N,N′,N′-Tetramethylphosphorodiamidate,         N-Phenylcarbamate, Borate, Dimethylphosphinothioyl,         2,4-Dinitrophenylsulfenate); and     -   Sulfonates (Sulfate, Methanesulfonate (Mesylate),         Benzylsulfonate, Tosylate).

Typical 1,2-diol protecting groups (thus, generally where two OH groups are taken together with the protecting functionality) are described in Greene at pages 118-142 and include Cyclic Acetals and Ketals (Methylene, Ethylidene, 1-t-Butylethylidene, 1-Phenylethylidene, (4-Methoxyphenyl)ethylidene, 2,2,2-Trichloroethylidene, Acetonide (Isopropylidene), Cyclopentylidene, Cyclohexylidene, Cycloheptylidene, Benzylidene, p-Methoxybenzylidene, 2,4-Dimethoxybenzylidene, 3,4-Dimethoxybenzylidene, 2-Nitrobenzylidene); Cyclic Ortho Esters (Methoxymethylene, Ethoxymethylene, Dimethoxymethylene, 1-Methoxyethylidene, 1-Ethoxyethylidine, 1,2-Dimethoxyethylidene, α-Methoxybenzylidene, 1-(N,N-Dimethylamino)ethylidene Derivative, α-(N,N-Dimethylamino)benzylidene Derivative, 2-Oxacyclopentylidene); Silyl Derivatives (Di-t-butylsilylene Group, 1,3-(1,1,3,3-Tetraisopropyldisiloxanylidene), and Tetra-t-butoxydisiloxane-1,3-diylidene), Cyclic Carbonates, Cyclic Boronates, Ethyl Boronate and Phenyl Boronate.

More typically, 1,2-diol protecting groups include those shown in Table B, still more typically, epoxides, acetonides, cyclic ketals and aryl acetals.

TABLE B

wherein R⁹ is C₁-C₆ alkyl.

Amino Protecting Groups

Another set of protecting groups include any of the typical amino protecting groups described by Greene at pages 315-385. They include:

-   -   Carbamates: (methyl and ethyl, 9-fluorenylmethyl,         9(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluorenylmethyl,         2,7-di-t-butyl-[9-(10,10-dioxo-10,10,10,10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)]methyl,         4-methoxyphenacyl);     -   Substituted Ethyl: (2,2,2-trichoroethyl, 2-trimethylsilylethyl,         2-phenylethyl, 1-(1-adamantyl)-1-methyl ethyl,         1,1-dimethyl-2-haloethyl, 1,1-dimethyl-2,2-dibromoethyl,         1,1-dimethyl-2,2,2-trichloroethyl,         1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethyl,         1-(3,5-di-t-butylphenyl)-1-methylethyl, 2-(2′- and         4′-pyridyl)ethyl, 2-(N,N-dicyclohexylcarboxamido)ethyl, t-butyl,         1-adamantyl, vinyl, allyl, 1-isopropylallyl, cinnamyl,         4-nitrocinnamyl, 8-quinolyl, N-hydroxypiperidinyl, alkyldithio,         benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl, p-nitrobenzyl, p-bromobenzyl,         p-chlorobenzyl, 2,4-dichlorobenzyl, 4-methylsulfinylbenzyl,         9-anthrylmethyl, diphenylmethyl);     -   Groups With Assisted Cleavage: (2-methylthioethyl,         2-methylsulfonylethyl, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl,         [2-(1,3-dithianyl)]methyl, 4-methylthiophenyl,         2,4-dimethylthiophenyl, 2-phosphonioethyl,         2-triphenylphosphonioisopropyl, 1,1-dimethyl-2-cyanoethyl,         m-choro-p-acyloxybenzyl, p-(dihydroxyboryl)benzyl,         5-benzisoxazolylmethyl, 2-(trifluoromethyl)-6-chromonylmethyl);     -   Groups Capable of Photolytic Cleavage: (m-nitrophenyl,         3,5-dimethoxybenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, 3,4-dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyl,         phenyl(o-nitrophenyl)methyl); Urea-Type Derivatives         (phenothiazinyl-(10)-carbonyl,         N′-p-toluenesulfonylaminocarbonyl, N′-phenylaminothiocarbonyl);     -   Miscellaneous Carbamates: (t-amyl, S-benzyl thiocarbamate,         p-cyanobenzyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl,         cyclopropylmethyl, p-decyloxybenzyl, diisopropylmethyl,         2,2-dimethoxycarbonylvinyl, o-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)benzyl,         1,1-dimethyl-3-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)propyl,         1,1-dimethylpropynyl, di(2-pyridyl)methyl, 2-furanylmethyl,         2-Iodoethyl, Isobornyl, Isobutyl, Isonicotinyl,         p-(p′-Methoxyphenylazo)benzyl, 1-methylcyclobutyl,         1-methylcyclohexyl, 1-methyl-1-cyclopropylmethyl,         1-methyl-1-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl,         1-methyl-1-(p-phenylazophenyl)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl,         1-methyl-1-(4-pyridyl)ethyl, phenyl, p-(phenylazo)benzyl,         2,4,6-tri-t-butylphenyl, 4-(trimethylammonium)benzyl,         2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl);     -   Amides: (N-formyl, N-acetyl, N-choroacetyl, N-trichoroacetyl,         N-trifluoroacetyl, N-phenylacetyl, N-3-phenylpropionyl,         N-picolinoyl, N-3-pyridylcarboxamide, N-benzoylphenylalanyl,         N-benzoyl, N-p-phenylbenzoyl);     -   Amides With Assisted Cleavage: (N-o-nitrophenylacetyl,         N-o-nitrophenoxyacetyl, N-acetoacetyl,         (N′-dithiobenzyloxycarbonylamino)acetyl,         N-3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propionyl, N-3-(o-nitrophenyl)propionyl,         N-2-methyl-2-(o-nitrophenoxy)propionyl,         N-2-methyl-2-(o-phenylazophenoxy)propionyl, N-4-chlorobutyryl,         N-3-methyl-3-nitrobutyryl, N-o-nitrocinnamoyl,         N-acetylmethionine, N-o-nitrobenzoyl,         N-o-(benzoyloxymethyl)benzoyl, 4,5-diphenyl-3-oxazolin-2-one);     -   Cyclic Imide Derivatives: (N-phthalimide, N-dithiasuccinoyl,         N-2,3-diphenylmaleoyl, N-2,5-dimethylpyrrolyl,         N-1,1,4,4-tetramethyldisilylazacyclopentane adduct,         5-substituted 1,3-dimethyl-1,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one,         5-substituted 1,3-dibenzyl-1,3-5-triazacyclohexan-2-one,         1-substituted 3,5-dinitro-4-pyridonyl);     -   N-Alkyl and N-Aryl Amines: (N-methyl, N-allyl,         N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl, N-3-acetoxypropyl,         N-(1-isopropyl-4-nitro-2-oxo-3-pyrrolin-3-yl), Quaternary         Ammonium Salts, N-benzyl, N-di(4-methoxyphenyl)methyl,         N-5-dibenzosuberyl, N-triphenylmethyl,         N-(4-methoxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl, N-9-phenylfluorenyl,         N-2,7-dichloro-9-fluorenylmethylene, N-ferrocenylmethyl,         N-2-picolylamine N,-oxide);     -   Imine Derivatives: (N-1,1-dimethylthiomethylene, N-benzylidene,         N-p-methoxybenzylidene, N-diphenylmethylene,         N-[(2-pyridyl)mesityl]methylene, N,(N′,N-dimethylaminomethylene,         N,N′-isopropylidene, N-p-nitrobenzylidene, N-salicylidene,         N-5-chlorosalicylidene,         N-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)phenylmethylene, N-cyclohexylidene);     -   Enamine Derivatives: (N-(5,5-dimethyl-3-oxo-1-cyclohexenyl));     -   N-Metal Derivatives (N-borane derivatives, N-diphenylborinic         acid derivatives, N-[phenyl(pentacarbonylchromium- or         -tungsten)]carbenzyl, N-copper or N-zinc chelate);     -   N—N Derivatives: (N-nitro, N-nitroso, N-oxide);     -   N—P Derivatives: (N-diphenylphosphinyl,         N-dimethylthiophosphinyl, N-diphenylthiophosphinyl, N-dialkyl         phosphoryl, N-dibenzyl phosphoryl, N-diphenyl phosphoryl);     -   N—Si Derivatives, N—S Derivatives, and N-Sulfenyl Derivatives:         (N-benzenesulfenyl, N-o-nitrobenzenesulfenyl,         N-2,4-dinitrobenzenesulfenyl, N-pentachlorobenzenesulfenyl,         N-2-nitro-4-methoxybenzenesulfenyl, N-triphenylmethylsulfenyl,         N-3-nitropyridinesulfenyl); and N-sulfonyl Derivatives         (N-p-toluenesulfonyl, N-benzenesulfonyl,         N-2,3,6-trimethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl,         N-2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonyl,         N-2,6-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl,         N-pentamethylbenzenesulfonyl,         N-2,3,5,6,-tetramethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl,         N-4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl, N-2,4,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonyl,         N-2,6-dimethoxy-4-methylbenzenesulfonyl,         N-2,2,5,7,8-pentamethylchroman-6-sulfonyl, N-methanesulfonyl,         N-β-trimethylsilyethanesulfonyl, N-9-anthracenesulfonyl,         N-4-(4′,8′-dimethoxynaphthylmethyl)benzenesulfonyl,         N-benzylsulfonyl, N-trifluoromethylsulfonyl,         N-phenacylsulfonyl).

More typically, protected amino groups include carbamates and amides, still more typically, —NHC(O)R¹ or —N═CR¹N(R¹)₂. Another protecting group, also useful as a prodrug for amino or —NH(R⁵), is:

See for example Alexander, J. et al. (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39:480-486.

Amino Acid and Polypeptide Protecting Group and Conjugates

An amino acid or polypeptide protecting group of a compound of the invention has the structure R¹⁵NHCH(R¹⁶)C(O)—, where R¹⁵ is H, an amino acid or polypeptide residue, or R⁵, and R¹⁶ is defined below.

R¹⁶ is lower alkyl or lower alkyl (C₁-C₆) substituted with amino, carboxyl, amide, carboxyl ester, hydroxyl, C₆-C₇ aryl, guanidinyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, sulfhydryl, sulfoxide, and/or alkylphosphate. R¹⁰ also is taken together with the amino acid α N to form a proline residue (R¹⁰=—CH₂)₃—). However, R¹⁰ is generally the side group of a naturally-occurring amino acid such as H, —CH₃, —CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂—CH(CH₃)₂, —CHCH₃—CH₂—CH₃, —CH₂—C₆H₅, —CH₂CH₂—S—CH₃, —CH₂OH, —CH(OH)—CH₃, —CH₂—SH, —CH₂—C₆H₄OH, —CH₂—CO—NH₂, —CH₂—CH₂—CO—NH₂, —CH₂—COOH, —CH₂—CH₂—COOH, —(CH₂)₄—NH₂ and —(CH₂)₃—NH—C(NH₂)—NH₂. R₁₀ also includes 1-guanidinoprop-3-yl, benzyl, 4-hydroxybenzyl, imidazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, methoxyphenyl and ethoxyphenyl.

Another set of protecting groups include the residue of an amino-containing compound, in particular an amino acid, a polypeptide, a protecting group, —NHSO₂R, NHC(O)R, —N(R)₂, NH₂ or —NH(R)(H), whereby for example a carboxylic acid is reacted, i.e. coupled, with the amine to form an amide, as in C(O)NR₂. A phosphonic acid may be reacted with the amine to form a phosphonamidate, as in —P(O)(OR)(NR₂).

In general, amino acids have the structure R¹⁷C(O)CH(R¹⁶)NH—, where R¹⁷ is —OH, —OR, an amino acid or a polypeptide residue. Amino acids are low molecular weight compounds, on the order of less than about 1000 MW and which contain at least one amino or imino group and at least one carboxyl group. Generally the amino acids will be found in nature, i.e., can be detected in biological material such as bacteria or other microbes, plants, animals or man. Suitable amino acids typically are alpha amino acids, i.e. compounds characterized by one amino or imino nitrogen atom separated from the carbon atom of one carboxyl group by a single substituted or unsubstituted alpha carbon atom. Of particular interest are hydrophobic residues such as mono- or di-alkyl or aryl amino acids, cycloalkylamino acids and the like. These residues contribute to cell permeability by increasing the partition coefficient of the parental drug. Typically, the residue does not contain a sulfhydryl or guanidino substituent.

Naturally-occurring amino acid residues are those residues found naturally in plants, animals or microbes, especially proteins thereof. Polypeptides most typically will be substantially composed of such naturally-occurring amino acid residues. These amino acids are glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, serine, threonine, cysteine, methionine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, lysine, hydroxylysine, arginine, histidine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, proline, asparagine, glutamine and hydroxyproline. Additionally, unnatural amino acids, for example, valanine, phenylglycine and homoarginine are also included. Commonly encountered amino acids that are not gene-encoded may also be used in the present invention. All of the amino acids used in the present invention may be either the D- or L-optical isomer. In addition, other peptidomimetics are also useful in the present invention. For a general review, see Spatola, A. F., in Chemistry and Biochemistry of Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins, B. Weinstein, eds., Marcel Dekker, New York, p. 267 (1983).

When protecting groups are single amino acid residues or polypeptides they optionally are substituted at R³ of substituents A¹, A² or A³ in a compound of the invention. These conjugates are produced by forming an amide bond between a carboxyl group of the amino acid (or C-terminal amino acid of a polypeptide for example). Similarly, conjugates are formed between R³ and an amino group of an amino acid or polypeptide. Generally, only one of any site in the parental molecule is amidated with an amino acid as described herein, although it is within the scope of this invention to introduce amino acids at more than one permitted site. Usually, a carboxyl group of R³ is amidated with an amino acid. In general, the α-amino or α-carboxyl group of the amino acid or the terminal amino or carboxyl group of a polypeptide are bonded to the parental functionalities, i.e., carboxyl or amino groups in the amino acid side chains generally are not used to form the amide bonds with the parental compound (although these groups may need to be protected during synthesis of the conjugates as described further below).

With respect to the carboxyl-containing side chains of amino acids or polypeptides it will be understood that the carboxyl group optionally will be blocked, e.g., by R¹, esterified with R⁵ or amidated. Similarly, the amino side chains R¹⁶ optionally will be blocked with R¹ or substituted with R⁵.

Such ester or amide bonds with side chain amino or carboxyl groups, like the esters or amides with the parental molecule, optionally are hydrolyzable in vivo or in vitro under acidic (pH <3) or basic (pH >10) conditions. Alternatively, they are substantially stable in the gastrointestinal tract of humans but are hydrolyzed enzymatically in blood or in intracellular environments. The esters or amino acid or polypeptide amidates also are useful as intermediates for the preparation of the parental molecule containing free amino or carboxyl groups. The free acid or base of the parental compound, for example, is readily formed from the esters or amino acid or polypeptide conjugates of this invention by conventional hydrolysis procedures.

When an amino acid residue contains one or more chiral centers, any of the D, L, meso, threo or erythro (as appropriate) racemates, scalemates or mixtures thereof may be used. In general, if the intermediates are to be hydrolyzed non-enzymatically (as would be the case where the amides are used as chemical intermediates for the free acids or free amines), D isomers are useful. On the other hand, L isomers are more versatile since they can be susceptible to both non-enzymatic and enzymatic hydrolysis, and are more efficiently transported by amino acid or dipeptidyl transport systems in the gastrointestinal tract.

Examples of suitable amino acids whose residues are represented by R^(x) or R^(y) include the following:

Glycine;

Aminopolycarboxylic acids, e.g., aspartic acid, β-hydroxyaspartic acid, glutamic acid, β-hydroxyglutamic acid, β-methylaspartic acid, β-methylglutamic acid, β,β-dimethylaspartic acid, γ-hydroxyglutamic acid, β,γ-dihydroxyglutamic acid, β-phenylglutamic acid, γ-methyleneglutamic acid, 3-aminoadipic acid, 2-aminopimelic acid, 2-aminosuberic acid and 2-aminosebacic acid;

Amino acid amides such as glutamine and asparagine;

Polyamino- or polybasic-monocarboxylic acids such as arginine, lysine, β-aminoalanine, γ-aminobutyrine, ornithine, citruline, homoarginine, homocitrulline, hydroxylysine, allohydroxylsine and diaminobutyric acid;

Other basic amino acid residues such as histidine;

Diaminodicarboxylic acids such as α,α′-diaminosuccinic acid, α,α′-diaminoglutaric acid, α,α′-diaminoadipic acid, α,α′-diaminopimelic acid, α,α′-diamino-β-hydroxypimelic acid, α,α′-diaminosuberic acid, α,α′-diaminoazelaic acid, and α,α′-diaminosebacic acid;

imino acids such as proline, hydroxyproline, allohydroxyproline, Δ-methylproline, pipecolic acid, 5-hydroxypipecolic acid, and azetidine-2-carboxylic acid;

A mono- or di-alkyl (typically C₁-C₈ branched or normal) amino acid such as alanine, valine, leucine, allylglycine, butyrine, norvaline, norleucine, heptyline, α-methylserine, α-amino-α-methyl-γ-hydroxyvaleric acid, α-amino-α-methyl-δ-hydroxyvaleric acid, α-amino-α-methyl-ε-hydroxycaproic acid, isovaline, α-methylglutamic acid, α-aminoisobutyric acid, α-aminodiethylacetic acid, α-aminodiisopropylacetic acid, α-aminodi-n-propylacetic acid, α-aminodiisobutylacetic acid, α-aminodi-n-butylacetic acid, α-aminoethylisopropylacetic acid, α-amino-n-propylacetic acid, α-aminodiisoamyacetic acid, α-methylaspartic acid, α-methylglutamic acid, 1-aminocyclopropane-1-carboxylic acid, isoleucine, alloisoleucine, tert-leucine, β-methyltryptophan and α-amino-β-ethyl-β-phenylpropionic acid;

-   β-phenylserinyl;

Aliphatic α-amino-β-hydroxy acids such as serine, β-hydroxyleucine, β-hydroxynorleucine, β-hydroxynorvaline, and α-amino-β-hydroxystearic acid;

α-Amino, α-, γ-, δ- or ε-hydroxy acids such as homoserine, δ-hydroxynorvaline, γ-hydroxynorvaline and ε-hydroxynorleucine residues; canavine and canaline; γ-hydroxyornithine;

2-hexosaminic acids such as D-glucosaminic acid or D-galactosaminic acid;

α-Amino-β-thiols such as penicillamine, β-thiolnorvaline or β-thiolbutyrine;

Other sulfur containing amino acid residues including cysteine; homocystine, β-phenylmethionine, methionine, S-allyl-L-cysteine sulfoxide, 2-thiolhistidine, cystathionine, and thiol ethers of cysteine or homocysteine;

Phenylalanine, tryptophan and ring-substituted α-amino acids such as the phenyl- or cyclohexylamino acids α-aminophenylacetic acid, α-aminocyclohexylacetic acid and α-amino-β-cyclohexylpropionic acid; phenylalanine analogues and derivatives comprising aryl, lower alkyl, hydroxy, guanidino, oxyalkylether, nitro, sulfur or halo-substituted phenyl (e.g., tyrosine, methyltyrosine and o-chloro-, p-chloro-, 3,4-dichloro, o-, m- or p-methyl-, 2,4,6-trimethyl-, 2-ethoxy-5-nitro-, 2-hydroxy-5-nitro- and p-nitro-phenylalanine); furyl-, thienyl-, pyridyl-, pyrimidinyl-, purinyl- or naphthyl-alanines; and tryptophan analogues and derivatives including kynurenine, 3-hydroxykynurenine, 2-hydroxytryptophan and 4-carboxytryptophan;

α-Amino substituted amino acids including sarcosine (N-methylglycine), N-benzylglycine, N-methylalanine, N-benzylalanine, N-methylphenylalanine, N-benzylphenylalanine, N-methylvaline and N-benzylvaline; and

α-Hydroxy and substituted α-hydroxy amino acids including serine, threonine, allothreonine, phosphoserine and phosphothreonine.

Polypeptides are polymers of amino acids in which a carboxyl group of one amino acid monomer is bonded to an amino or imino group of the next amino acid monomer by an amide bond. Polypeptides include dipeptides, low molecular weight polypeptides (about 1500-5000 MW) and proteins. Proteins optionally contain 3, 5, 10, 50, 75, 100 or more residues, and suitably are substantially sequence-homologous with human, animal, plant or microbial proteins. They include enzymes (e.g., hydrogen peroxidase) as well as immunogens such as KLH, or antibodies or proteins of any type against which one wishes to raise an immune response. The nature and identity of the polypeptide may vary widely.

The polypeptide amidates are useful as immunogens in raising antibodies against either the polypeptide (if it is not immunogenic in the animal to which it is administered) or against the epitopes on the remainder of the compound of this invention.

Antibodies capable of binding to the parental non-peptidyl compound are used to separate the parental compound from mixtures, for example in diagnosis or manufacturing of the parental compound. The conjugates of parental compound and polypeptide generally are more immunogenic than the polypeptides in closely homologous animals, and therefore make the polypeptide more immunogenic for facilitating raising antibodies against it. Accordingly, the polypeptide or protein may not need to be immunogenic in an animal typically used to raise antibodies, e.g., rabbit, mouse, horse, or rat, but the final product conjugate should be immunogenic in at least one of such animals. The polypeptide optionally contains a peptidolytic enzyme cleavage site at the peptide bond between the first and second residues adjacent to the acidic heteroatom. Such cleavage sites are flanked by enzymatic recognition structures, e.g., a particular sequence of residues recognized by a peptidolytic enzyme.

Peptidolytic enzymes for cleaving the polypeptide conjugates of this invention are well known, and in particular include carboxypeptidases. Carboxypeptidases digest polypeptides by removing C-terminal residues, and are specific in many instances for particular C-terminal sequences. Such enzymes and their substrate requirements in general are well known. For example, a dipeptide (having a given pair of residues and a free carboxyl terminus) is covalently bonded through its α-amino group to the phosphorus or carbon atoms of the compounds herein. In embodiments where W₁ is phosphonate it is expected that this peptide will be cleaved by the appropriate peptidolytic enzyme, leaving the carboxyl of the proximal amino acid residue to autocatalytically cleave the phosphonoamidate bond.

Suitable dipeptidyl groups (designated by their single letter code) are AA, AR, AN, AD, AC, AE, AQ, AG, AH, AI, AL, AK, AM, AF, AP, AS, AT, AW, AY, AV, RA, RR, RN, RD, RC, RE, RQ, RG, RH, RI, RL, RK, RM, RF, RP, RS, RT, RW, RY, RV, NA, NR, NN, ND, NC, NE, NQ, NG, NH, NI, NL, NK, NM, NF, NP, NS, NT, NR, NY, NV, DA, DR, DN, DD, DC, DE, DQ, DG, DH, DI, DL, DK, DM, DF, DP, DS, DT, DW, DY, DV, CA, CR, CN, CD, CC, CE, CQ, CG, CH, Cl, CL, CK, CM, CF, CP, CS, CT, CW, CY, CV, EA, ER, EN, ED, EC, EE, EQ, EG, EH, EI, EL, EK, EM, EF, EP, ES, ET, EW, EY, EV, QA, QR, QN, QD, QC, QE, QQ, QG, QH, QI, QL, QK, QM, QF, QP, QS, QT, QW, QY, QV, GA, GR, GN, GD, OC, GE, GQ, GG, GH, GI, GL, GK, GM, GF, GP, GS, GT, GW, GY, GV, HA, HR, HN, HD, HC, HE, HQ, HG, HH, HI, HL, HK, HM, HF, HP, HS, HT, HW, HY, HV, IA, IR, IN, ID, IC, IE, IQ, IG, IH, II, IL, IK, IM, IF, IP, IS, IT, IW, IY, IV, LA, LR, LN, LD, LC, LE, LQ, LG, LH, LI, LL, LK, LM, LF, LP, LS, LT, LW, LY, LV, KA, KR, KN, KD, KC, KE, KQ, KG, KH, KI, KL, KK, KM, KF, KP, KS, KT, KW, KY, KV, MA, MR, MN, MD, MC, ME, MQ, MG, MH, MI, ML, MK, MM, MF, MP, MS, MT, MW, MY, MV, FA, FR, FN, FD, FC, FE, FQ, FG, FH, FI, FL, FK, FM, FF, FP, FS, FT, FW, FY, FV, PA, PR, PN, PD, PC, PE, PQ, PG, PH, PI, PL, PK, PM, PF, PP, PS, PT, PW, PY, PV, SA, SR, SN, SD, SC, SE, SQ, SG, SH, SI, SL, SK, SM, SF, SP, SS, ST, SW, SY, SV, TA, TR, TN, TD, TC, TE, TQ, TG, TH, TI, TL, TK, TM, TF, TP, TS, TT, TW, TY, TV, WA, WR, WN, WD, WC, WE, WQ, WG, WH, WI, WL, WK, WM, WF, WP, WS, WT, WW, WY, WV, YA, YR, YN, YD, YC, YE, YQ, YG, YH, YI, YL, YK, YM, YF, YP, YS, YT, YW, YY, YV, VA, VR, VN, VD, VC, VE, VQ, VG, VH, VI, VL, VK, VM, VF, VP, VS, VT, VW, VY and VV.

Tripeptide residues are also useful as protecting groups. When a phosphonate is to be protected, the sequence —X⁴-pro-X⁵ (where X⁴ is any amino acid residue and X⁵ is an amino acid residue, a carboxyl ester of proline, or hydrogen) will be cleaved by luminal carboxypeptidase to yield X⁴ with a free carboxyl, which in turn is expected to autocatalytically cleave the phosphonoamidate bond. The carboxy group of X⁵ optionally is esterified with benzyl.

Dipeptide or tripeptide species can be selected on the basis of known transport properties and/or susceptibility to peptidases that can affect transport to intestinal mucosal or other cell types. Dipeptides and tripeptides lacking an α-amino group are transport substrates for the peptide transporter found in brush border membrane of intestinal mucosal cells (Bai, J. P. F., (1992) Pharm Res. 9:969-978). Transport competent peptides can thus be used to enhance bioavailability of the amidate compounds. Di- or tripeptides having one or more amino acids in the D configuration are also compatible with peptide transport and can be utilized in the amidate compounds of this invention. Amino acids in the D configuration can be used to reduce the susceptibility of a di- or tripeptide to hydrolysis by proteases common to the brush border such as aminopeptidase N. In addition, di- or tripeptides alternatively are selected on the basis of their relative resistance to hydrolysis by proteases found in the lumen of the intestine. For example, tripeptides or polypeptides lacking asp and/or glu are poor substrates for aminopeptidase A, di- or tripeptides lacking amino acid residues on the N-terminal side of hydrophobic amino acids (leu, tyr, phe, val, trp) are poor substrates for endopeptidase, and peptides lacking a pro residue at the penultimate position at a free carboxyl terminus are poor substrates for carboxypeptidase P. Similar considerations can also be applied to the selection of peptides that are either relatively resistant or relatively susceptible to hydrolysis by cytosolic, renal, hepatic, serum or other peptidases. Such poorly cleaved polypeptide amidates are immunogens or are useful for bonding to proteins in order to prepare immunogens.

SPECIFIC EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION

Specific values described for radicals, substituents, and ranges, as well as specific embodiments of the invention described herein, are for illustration only; they do not exclude other defined values or other values within defined ranges.

In one specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

and W^(5a) is a carbocycle or a heterocycle where W^(5a) is independently substituted with 0 or 1 R² groups. A specific value for M12a is 1.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

wherein W^(5a) is a carbocycle independently substituted with 0 or 1 R² groups;

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

wherein W^(5a) is a carbocycle independently substituted with 0 or 1 R² groups;

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

wherein W^(5a) is a carbocycle or heterocycle where W^(5a) is independently substituted with 0 or 1 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A¹ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention M12b is 1.

In another specific embodiment of the invention M12b is 0, Y² is a bond and W⁵ is a carbocycle or heterocycle where W⁵ is optionally and independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is of the formula:

wherein W^(5a) is a carbocycle or heterocycle where W^(5a) is optionally and independently substituted with 1,-2, or 3 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention M12a is 1.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is selected from phenyl, substituted phenyl, benzyl, substituted benzyl, pyridyl and substituted pyridyl.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A² is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention M12b is 1.

In a specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; and Y^(2a) is O, N(R^(x)) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)).

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention M12d is 1.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention W⁵ is a carbocycle.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention W⁵ is phenyl.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; and Y^(2a) is O, N(R^(x)) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)).

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention R¹ is H.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; and Y^(2a) is O, N(R²) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and Y^(2c) is O, N(R^(y)) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); Y^(2d) is O or N(R^(y)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²).

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; and Y^(2a) is O, N(R²) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and Y^(2c) O, N(R^(y)) or S.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); Y^(2d) is O or N(R^(y)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein Y^(2b) is O or N(R²).

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein: Y^(2b) is O or N(R^(x)); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.

In another specific embodiment of the invention A³ is of the formula:

In a specific embodiment of the invention A⁰ is of the formula:

wherein each R is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl.

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is independently H, R¹, W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein:

R^(y) is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group;

R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms;

R² is independently H, R¹, R³ or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 carbons and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

wherein R³ is as defined herein.

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is O or S; and Y^(2c) is O, N(R^(y)) or S.

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

wherein Y^(1a) is Q or S; and Y^(2d) is O or N(R^(y)).

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(y) is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 10 carbons.

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

In a specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is of the formula:

In a specific embodiment of the invention Y¹ is O or S

In a specific embodiment of the invention Y² is O, N(R^(y)) or S.

In one specific embodiment of the invention R^(x) is a group of the formula:

wherein:

m1a, m1b, m1c, m1d and m1e are independently 0 or 1;

m12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

R^(y) is H, W³, R² or a protecting group;

wherein W³, R², Y¹ and Y² are as defined herein;

provided that:

if m1a, m12c, and m1d are 0, then m1b, m1c and m1e are 0;

if m1a and m12c are 0 and m1d is not 0, then m1b and m1c are 0;

if m1a and m1d are 0 and m12c is not 0, then m1b and at least one of m1c and m1e are 0;

if m1a is 0 and m12c and m1d are not 0, then m1b is 0;

if m12c and m1d are 0 and m1a is not 0, then at least two of m1b, m1c and m1e are 0;

if m12c is 0 and m1a and m1d are not 0, then at least one of m1b and m1c are 0; and

if m1d is 0 and m1a and m12c are not 0, then at least one of m1c and m1e are 0.

In compounds of the invention W⁵ carbocycles and W⁵ heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups. W⁵ may be a saturated, unsaturated or aromatic ring comprising a mono- or bicyclic carbocycle or heterocycle. W⁵ may have 3 to 10 ring atoms, e.g., 3 to 7 ring atoms. The W⁵ rings are saturated when containing 3 ring atoms, saturated or mono-unsaturated when containing 4 ring atoms, saturated, or mono- or di-unsaturated when containing 5 ring atoms, and saturated, mono- or di-unsaturated, or aromatic when containing 6 ring atoms.

A W⁵ heterocycle may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S). W⁵ heterocyclic monocycles may have 3 to 6 ring atoms (2 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S); or 5 or 6 ring atoms (3 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N and S). W⁵ heterocyclic bicycles have 7 to 10 ring atoms (6 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system; or 9 to 10 ring atoms (8 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 hetero atoms selected from N and S) arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system. The W⁵ heterocycle may be bonded to Y² through a carbon, nitrogen, sulfur or other atom by a stable covalent bond.

W⁵ heterocycles include for example, pyridyl, dihydropyridyl isomers, piperidine, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, s-triazinyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, thiofuranyl, thienyl, and pyrrolyl. W⁵ also includes, but is not limited to, examples such as:

W⁵ carbocycles and heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups, as defined above. For example, substituted W⁵ carbocycles include:

Examples of substituted phenyl carbocycles include:

Linking Groups and Linkers

The invention provides conjugates that comprise an HIV inhibiting compound that is optionally linked to one or more phosphonate groups either directly (e.g. through a covalent bond) or through a linking group (i.e. a linker). The nature of the linker is not critical provided it does not interfere with the ability of the phosphonate containing compound to function as a therapeutic agent. The phosphonate or the linker can be linked to the compound (e.g. a compound of formula A) at any synthetically feasible position on the compound by removing a hydrogen or any portion of the compound to provide an open valence for attachment of the phosphonate or the linker.

In one embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker (which can be designated “L”) can include all or a portions of the group A⁰, A¹, A², or W³ described herein.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker has a molecular weight of from about 20 daltons to about 400 daltons.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker has a length of about 5 angstroms to about 300 angstroms.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker separates the DRUG and a P(═Y¹) residue by about 5 angstroms to about 200 angstroms, inclusive, in length.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is a divalent, branched or unbranched, saturated or unsaturated, hydrocarbon chain, having from 2 to 25 carbon atoms, wherein one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) of the carbon atoms is optionally replaced by (—O—), and wherein the chain is optionally substituted on carbon with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) substituents selected from (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, (C₃-C₆)cycloalkyl, (C₁-C₆)alkanoyl, (C₁-C₆)alkanoyloxy, (C₁-C₆)alkoxycarbonyl, (C₁-C₆)alkylthio, azido, cyano, nitro, halo, hydroxy, oxo (═O), carboxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, and heteroaryloxy.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is of the formula W-A wherein A is (C₁-C₂₄)alkyl, (C₂-C₂₄)alkenyl, (C₂-C₂₄)alkynyl, (C₃-C₈)cycloalkyl, (C₆-C₁₀)aryl or a combination thereof, wherein W is —N(R)C(═O)—, —C(═O)N(R)—, —OC(═O)—, —C(═O)O—, —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —N(R)—, —C(═O)—, or a direct bond; wherein each R is independently H or (C₁-C₆)alkyl.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is a divalent radical formed from a peptide.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is a divalent radical formed from an amino acid.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is a divalent radical formed from poly-L-glutamic acid, poly-L-aspartic acid, poly-L-histidine, poly-L-ornithine, poly-L-serine, poly-L-threonine, poly-L-tyrosine, poly-L-leucine, poly-L-lysine-L-phenylalanine, poly-L-lysine or poly-L-lysine-L-tyrosine.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is of the formula W—(CH₂)_(n) wherein, n is between about 1 and about 10; and W is —N(R)C(═O)—, —C(═O)N(R)—, —OC(═O)—, —C(═O)O—, —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —C(═O)—, —N(R)—, or a direct bond; wherein each R is independently H or (C₁-C₆)alkyl.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is methylene, ethylene, or propylene.

In another embodiment of the invention the linking group or linker is attached to the phosphonate group through a carbon atom of the linker.

Intracellular Targeting

The optionally incorporated phosphonate group of the compounds of the invention may cleave in vivo in stages after they have reached the desired site of action, i.e. inside a cell. One mechanism of action inside a cell may entail a first cleavage, e.g. by esterase, to provide a negatively-charged “locked-in” intermediate. Cleavage of a terminal ester grouping in a compound of the invention thus affords an unstable intermediate which releases a negatively charged “locked in” intermediate.

After passage inside a cell, intracellular enzymatic cleavage or modification of the phosphonate or prodrug compound may result in an intracellular accumulation of the cleaved or modified compound by a “trapping” mechanism. The cleaved or modified compound may then be “locked-in” the cell by a significant change in charge, polarity, or other physical property change which decreases the rate at which the cleaved or modified compound can exit the cell, relative to the rate at which it entered as the phosphonate prodrug. Other mechanisms by which a therapeutic effect are achieved may be operative as well. Enzymes which are capable of an enzymatic activation mechanism with the phosphonate prodrug compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, amidases, esterases, microbial enzymes, phospholipases, cholinesterases, and phosphatases.

From the foregoing, it will be apparent that many different drugs can be derivatized in accord with the present invention. Numerous such drugs are specifically mentioned herein. However, it should be understood that the discussion of drug families and their specific members for derivatization according to this invention is not intended to be exhaustive, but merely illustrative.

HIV-Inhibitory Compounds

The compounds of the invention include those with HIV-inhibitory activity. The compounds of the inventions optionally bear one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) phosphonate groups, which may be a prodrug moiety.

The term “HIV-inhibitory compound” includes those compounds that inhibit HIV.

Typically, compounds of the invention have a molecular weight of from about 400 amu to about 10,000 amu; in a specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 5000 amu; in another specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 2500 amu; in another specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 1000 amu; in another specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 800 amu; in another specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 600 amu; and in another specific embodiment of the invention, compounds have a molecular weight of less than about 600 amu and a molecular weight of greater than about 400 amu.

The compounds of the invention also typically have a logD(polarity) less than about 5. In one embodiment the invention provides compounds having a logD less than about 4; in another one embodiment the invention provides compounds having a logD less than about 3; in another one embodiment the invention provides compounds having a logD greater than about −5; in another one embodiment the invention provides compounds having a logD greater than about −3; and in another one embodiment the invention provides compounds having a logD greater than about 0 and less than about 3.

Selected substituents within the compounds of the invention are present to a recursive degree. In this context, “recursive substituent” means that a substituent may recite another instance of itself. Because of the recursive nature of such substituents, theoretically, a large number may be present in any given embodiment. For example, R^(x) contains a R^(y) substituent. R^(y) can be R², which in turn can be R³. If R³ is selected to be R^(3c), then a second instance of R^(x) can be selected. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands that the total number of such substituents is reasonably limited by the desired properties of the compound intended. Such properties include, by of example and not limitation, physical properties such as molecular weight, solubility or log P, application properties such as activity against the intended target, and practical properties such as ease of synthesis.

By way of example and not limitation, W³, R¹ and R³ are all recursive substituents in certain embodiments. Typically, each of these may independently occur 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0, times in a given embodiment. More typically, each of these may independently occur 12 or fewer times in a given embodiment. More typically yet, W³ will occur 0 to 8 times, R^(y) will occur 0 to 6 times and R³ will occur 0 to 10 times in a given embodiment. Even more typically, W³ will occur 0 to 6 times, R^(y) will occur 0 to 4 times and R³ will occur 0 to 8 times in a given embodiment.

Recursive substituents are an intended aspect of the invention. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands the versatility of such substituents. To the degree that recursive substituents are present in an embodiment of the invention, the total number will be determined as set forth above.

Whenever a compound described herein is substituted with more than one of the same designated group, e.g., “R¹” or “R^(6a)”, then it will be understood that the groups may be the same or different, i.e., each group is independently selected. Wavy lines indicate the site of covalent bond attachments to the adjoining groups, moieties, or atoms.

In one embodiment of the invention, the compound is in an isolated and purified form. Generally, the term “isolated and purified” means that the compound is substantially free from biological materials (e.g. blood, tissue, cells, etc.). In one specific embodiment of the invention, the term means that the compound or conjugate of the invention is at least about 50 wt. % free from biological materials; in another specific embodiment, the term means that the compound or conjugate of the invention is at least about 75 wt. % free from biological materials; in another specific embodiment, the term means that the compound or conjugate of the invention is at least about 90 wt. % free from biological materials; in another specific embodiment, the term means that the compound or conjugate of the invention is at least about 98 wt. % free from biological materials; and in another embodiment, the term means that the compound or conjugate of the invention is at least about 99 wt. % free from biological materials. In another specific embodiment, the invention provides a compound or conjugate of the invention that has been synthetically prepared (e.g., ex vivo).

Cellular Accumulation

In one embodiment, the invention is provides compounds capable of accumulating in human PBMC (peripheral blood mononuclear cells). PBMC refer to blood cells having round lymphocytes and monocytes. Physiologically, PBMC are critical components of the mechanism against infection. PBMC may be isolated from heparinized whole blood of normal healthy donors or buffy coats, by standard density gradient centrifugation and harvested from the interface, washed (e.g. phosphate-buffered saline) and stored in freezing medium. PBMC may be cultured in multi-well plates. At various times of culture, supernatant may be either removed for assessment, or cells may be harvested and analyzed (Smith R. et al (2003) Blood 102(7):2532-2540). The compounds of this embodiment may further comprise a phosphonate or phosphonate prodrug. More typically, the phosphonate or phosphonate prodrug can have the structure A³ as described herein.

Typically, compounds of the invention demonstrate improved intracellular half-life of the compounds or intracellular metabolites of the compounds in human PBMC when compared to analogs of the compounds not having the phosphonate or phosphonate prodrug. Typically, the half-life is improved by at least about 50%, more typically at least in the range 50-100%, still more typically at least about 100%, more typically yet greater than about 100%.

In one embodiment of the invention the intracellular half-life of a metabolite of the compound in human PBMCs is improved when compared to an analog of the compound not having the phosphonate or phosphonate prodrug. In such embodiments, the metabolite may be generated intracellularly, e.g. generated within human PBMC. The metabolite may be a product of the cleavage of a phosphonate prodrug within human PBMCs. The optionally phosphonate-containing phosphonate prodrug may be cleaved to form a metabolite having at least one negative charge at physiological pH. The phosphonate prodrug may be enzymatically cleaved within human PBMC to form a phosphonate having at least one active hydrogen atom of the form P—OH.

Stereoisomers

The compounds of the invention may have chiral centers, e.g., chiral carbon or phosphorus atoms. The compounds of the invention thus include racemic mixtures of all stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, and atropisomers. In addition, the compounds of the invention include enriched or resolved optical isomers at any or all asymmetric, chiral atoms. In other words, the chiral centers apparent from the depictions are provided as the chiral isomers or racemic mixtures. Both racemic and diastereomeric mixtures, as well as the individual optical isomers isolated or synthesized, substantially free of their enantiomeric or diastereomeric partners, are all within the scope of the invention. The racemic mixtures are separated into their individual, substantially optically pure isomers through well-known techniques such as, for example, the separation of diastereomeric salts formed with optically active adjuncts, e.g., acids or bases followed by conversion back to the optically active substances. In most instances, the desired optical isomer is synthesized by means of stereospecific reactions, beginning with the appropriate stereoisomer of the desired starting material.

The compounds of the invention can also exist as tautomeric isomers in certain cases. All though only one delocalized resonance structure may be depicted, all such forms are contemplated within the scope of the invention. For example, ene-amine tautomers can exist for purine, pyrimidine, imidazole, guanidine, amidine, and tetrazole systems and all their possible tautomeric forms are within the scope of the invention.

Salts and Hydrates

The compositions of this invention optionally comprise salts of the compounds herein, especially pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic salts containing, for example, Na⁺, Li⁺, K⁺, Ca⁺² and Mg⁺². Such salts may include those derived by combination of appropriate cations such as alkali and alkaline earth metal ions or ammonium and quaternary amino ions with an acid anion moiety, typically a carboxylic acid. Monovalent salts are preferred if a water soluble salt is desired.

Metal salts typically are prepared by reacting the metal hydroxide with a compound of this invention. Examples of metal salts which are prepared in this way are salts containing Li⁺, Na⁺, and K⁺. A less soluble metal salt can be precipitated from the solution of a more soluble salt by addition of the suitable metal compound.

In addition, salts may be formed from acid addition of certain organic and inorganic acids, e.g., HCl, HBr, H₂SO₄, H₃PO₄ or organic sulfonic acids, to basic centers, typically amines, or to acidic groups. Finally, it is to be understood that the compositions herein comprise compounds of the invention in their un-ionized, as well as zwitterionic form, and combinations with stoichiometric amounts of water as in hydrates.

Also included within the scope of this invention are the salts of the parental compounds with one or more amino acids. Any of the amino acids described above are suitable, especially the naturally-occurring amino acids found as protein components, although the amino acid typically is one bearing a side chain with a basic or acidic group, e.g., lysine, arginine or glutamic acid, or a neutral group such as glycine, serine, threonine, alanine, isoleucine, or leucine.

Methods of Inhibition of HIV

Another aspect of the invention relates to methods of inhibiting the activity of HIV comprising the step of treating a sample suspected of containing HIV with a composition of the invention.

Compositions of the invention may act as inhibitors of HIV, as intermediates for such inhibitors or have other utilities as described below. The inhibitors will generally bind to locations on the surface or in a cavity of the liver. Compositions binding in the liver may bind with varying degrees of reversibility. Those compounds binding substantially irreversibly are ideal candidates for use in this method of the invention. Once labeled, the substantially irreversibly binding compositions are useful as probes for the detection of HIV. Accordingly, the invention relates to methods of detecting NS3 in a sample suspected of containing HIV comprising the steps of: treating a sample suspected of containing HIV with a composition comprising a compound of the invention bound to a label; and observing the effect of the sample on the activity of the label. Suitable labels are well known in the diagnostics field and include stable free radicals, fluorophores, radioisotopes, enzymes, chemiluminescent groups and chromogens. The compounds herein are labeled in conventional fashion using functional groups such as hydroxyl or amino.

Within the context of the invention samples suspected of containing HIV include natural or man-made materials such as living organisms; tissue or cell cultures; biological samples such as biological material samples (blood, serum, urine, cerebrospinal fluid, tears, sputum, saliva, tissue samples, and the like); laboratory samples; food, water, or air samples; bioproduct samples such as extracts of cells, particularly recombinant cells synthesizing a desired glycoprotein; and the like. Typically the sample will be suspected of containing HIV. Samples can be contained in any medium including water and organic solvent/water mixtures. Samples include living organisms such as humans, and man made materials such as cell cultures.

The treating step of the invention comprises adding the composition of the invention to the sample or it comprises adding a precursor of the composition to the sample. The addition step comprises any method of administration as described above.

If desired, the activity of HIV after application of the composition can be observed by any method including direct and indirect methods of detecting HIV activity. Quantitative, qualitative, and semiquantitative methods of determining HIV activity are all contemplated. Typically one of the screening methods described above are applied, however, any other method such as observation of the physiological properties of a living organism are also applicable.

Many organisms contain HIV. The compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment or prophylaxis of conditions associated with HIV activation in animals or in man.

However, in screening compounds capable of inhibiting HIV it should be kept in mind that the results of enzyme assays may not correlate with cell culture assays. Thus, a cell based assay should be the primary screening tool.

Screens for HIV Inhibitors

Compositions of the invention are screened for inhibitory activity against HIV by any of the conventional techniques for evaluating enzyme activity. Within the context of the invention, typically compositions are first screened for inhibition of HIV in vitro and compositions showing inhibitory activity are then screened for activity in vivo. Compositions having in vitro Ki (inhibitory constants) of less then about 5×10⁻⁶ M, typically less than about 1×10⁻⁷ M and preferably less than about 5×10⁻⁸ M are preferred for in vivo use.

Useful in vitro screens have been described in detail.

Pharmaceutical Formulations

The compounds of this invention are formulated with conventional carriers and excipients, which will be selected in accord with ordinary practice. Tablets will contain excipients, glidants, fillers, binders and the like. Aqueous formulations are prepared in sterile form, and when intended for delivery by other than oral administration generally will be isotonic. All formulations will optionally contain excipients such as those set forth in the Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (1986). Excipients include ascorbic acid and other antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA, carbohydrates such as dextrin, hydroxyalkylcellulose, hydroxyalkylmethylcellulose, stearic acid and the like. The pH of the formulations ranges from about 3 to about 11, but is ordinarily about 7 to 10.

While it is possible for the active ingredients to be administered alone it may be preferable to present them as pharmaceutical formulations. The formulations, both for veterinary and for human use, of the invention comprise at least one active ingredient, as above defined, together with one or more acceptable carriers therefor and optionally other therapeutic ingredients. The carrier(s) must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and physiologically innocuous to the recipient thereof.

The formulations include those suitable for the foregoing administration routes. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.). Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.

Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. The active ingredient may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.

A tablet is made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets may optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.

For administration to the eye or other external tissues e.g., mouth and skin, the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w (including active ingredient(s) in a range between 0.1% and 20% in increments of 0.1% w/w such as 0.6% w/w, 0.7% w/w, etc.), preferably 0.2 to 15% w/w and most preferably 0.5 to 10% w/w. When formulated in an ointment, the active ingredients may be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.

If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e. an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulphoxide and related analogs.

The oily phase of the emulsions of this invention may be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase may comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.

Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.

The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties. The cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils are used.

Pharmaceutical formulations according to the present invention comprise one or more compounds of the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients and optionally other therapeutic agents. Pharmaceutical formulations containing the active ingredient may be in any form suitable for the intended method of administration. When used for oral use for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, syrups or elixirs may be prepared. Compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation. Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable. These excipients may be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, lactose monohydrate, croscarmellose sodium, povidone, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets may be uncoated or may be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax may be employed.

Formulations for oral use may be also presented as hard gelatin capsules where the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.

Aqueous suspensions of the invention contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcelluose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate). The aqueous suspension may also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxy-benzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.

Oil suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oral suspensions may contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents, such as those set forth above, and flavoring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation. These compositions may be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.

Dispersible powders and granules of the invention suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent, and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those disclosed above. Additional excipients, for example sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.

The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil, such as olive oil or arachis oil, a mineral oil, such as liquid paraffin, or a mixture of these. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. The emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavoring agents. Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.

The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1,3-butane-diol or prepared as a lyophilized powder. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile fixed oils may conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid may likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.

The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. For example, a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans may contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which may vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weight:weight). The pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration. For example, an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion may contain from about 3 to 500 μg of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.

Formulations suitable for administration to the eye include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient. The active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of 0.5 to 20%, advantageously 0.5 to 10% particularly about 1.5% w/w.

Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.

Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.

Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns (including particle sizes in a range between 0.1 and 500 microns in increments microns such as 0.5, 1, 30 microns, 35 microns, etc.), which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs. Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient. Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration may be prepared according to conventional methods and may be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment or prophylaxis of conditions associated with HIV activity.

Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active ingredient such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.

Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents.

The formulations are presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injection, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.

It should be understood that in addition to the ingredients particularly mentioned above the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example those suitable for oral administration may include flavoring agents.

The invention further provides veterinary compositions comprising at least one active ingredient as above defined together with a veterinary carrier therefor.

Veterinary carriers are materials useful for the purpose of administering the composition and may be solid, liquid or gaseous materials which are otherwise inert or acceptable in the veterinary art and are compatible with the active ingredient. These veterinary compositions may be administered orally, parenterally or by any other desired route.

Compounds of the invention can also be formulated to provide controlled release of the active ingredient to allow less frequent dosing or to improve the pharmacokinetic or toxicity profile of the active ingredient. Accordingly, the invention also provided compositions comprising one or more compounds of the invention formulated for sustained or controlled release.

Effective dose of active ingredient depends at least on the nature of the condition being treated, toxicity, whether the compound is being used prophylactically (lower doses), the method of delivery, and the pharmaceutical formulation, and will be determined by the clinician using conventional dose escalation studies. It can be expected to be from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg/kg body weight per day. Typically, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg body weight per day. More typically, from about 0.01 to about 5 mg/kg body weight per day. More typically, from about 0.05 to about 0.5 mg/kg body weight per day. For example, the daily candidate dose for an adult human of approximately 70 kg body weight will range from 1 mg to 1000 mg, preferably between 5 mg and 500 mg, and may take the form of single or multiple doses.

Routes of Administration

One or more compounds of the invention (herein referred to as the active ingredients) are administered by any route appropriate to the condition to be treated. Suitable routes include oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), vaginal and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural), and the like. It will be appreciated that the preferred route may vary with for example the condition of the recipient. An advantage of the compounds of this invention is that they are orally bioavailable and can be dosed orally.

Combination Therapy

The compounds of the invention may be employed in combination with other therapeutic agents for the treatment or prophylaxis of the infections or conditions indicated above. Examples of such further therapeutic agents include agents that are effective for the treatment or prophylaxis of viral, parasitic or bacterial infections or associated conditions or for treatment of tumors or related conditions include 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine (zidovudine, AZT), 2′-deoxy-3′-thiacytidine (3TC), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydroadenosine (D4A), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrothymidine (D4T), carbovir (carbocyclic 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydroguanosine) 3′-azido-2′,3′-dideoxyuridine, 5-fluorothymidine, (E)-5-(2-bromovinyl)-2′-deoxyuridine (BVDU), 2-chlorodeoxyadenosine, 2-deoxycoformycin, 5-fluorouracil, 5-fluorouridine, 5-fluoro-2′-deoxyuridine, 5-trifluoromethyl-2′-deoxyuridine, 6-azauridine, 5-fluoroorotic acid, methotrexate, triacetyluridine, 1-(2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro-1-β-arabinosyl)-5-iodocytidine (FIAC), tetrahydro-imidazo(4,5,1-jk)-(1,4)-benzodiazepin-2(1H)-thione (TIBO), 2′-nor-cyclicGMP, 6-methoxypurine arabinoside (ara-M), 6-methoxypurine arabinoside 2′-O-valerate, cytosine arabinoside (ara-C), 2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides such as 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (ddC), 2′,3′-dideoxyadenosine (ddA) and 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (ddI), acyclic nucleosides such as acyclovir, penciclovir, famciclovir, ganciclovir, HPMPC, PMEA, PMEG, PMPA, PMPDAP, FPMPA, HPMPA, HPMPDAP, (2R,5R)-9->tetrahydro-5-(phosphonomethoxy)-2-furanyladenine, (2R,5R)-1->tetrahydro-5-(phosphonomethoxy)-2-furanylthymine, other antivirals including ribavirin (adenine arabinoside), 2-thio-6-azauridine, tubercidin, aurintricarboxylic acid, 3-deazaneoplanocin, neoplanocin, rimantidine, adamantine, and foscamet (trisodium phosphonoformate), antibacterial agents including bactericidal fluoroquinolones (ciprofloxacin, pefloxacin and the like), aminoglycoside bactericidal antibiotics (streptomycin, gentarnicin, amicacin and the like) β-lactamase inhibitors (cephalosporins, penicillins and the like), other antibacterials including tetracycline, isoniazid, rifampin, cefoperazone, claithromycin and azithromycin, antiparasite or antifungal agents including pentamidine (1,5-bis(4′-aminophenoxy)pentane), 9-deaza-inosine, sulfamethoxazole, sulfadiazine, quinapyramine, quinine, fluconazole, ketoconazole, itraconazole, Amphotericin B, 5-fluorocytosine, clotrimazole, hexadecylphosphocholine and nystatin, renal excretion inhibitors such as probenicid, nucleoside transport inhibitors such as dipyridamole, dilazep and nitrobenzylthioinosine, immunomodulators such as FK506, cyclosporin A, thymosin α-1, cytokines including TNF and TGF-β, interferons including IFN-α, IFN-β, and IFN-γ, interleukins including various interleukins, macrophage/granulocyte colony stimulating factors including GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, cytokine antagonists including anti-TNF antibodies, anti-interleukin antibodies, soluble interleukin receptors, protein kinase C inhibitors and the like.

In addition, the therapeutic agents disclosed in Tables 98 and 99 directed to HIV may be used in combination with compounds of the present invention. For example, Table 98 discloses exemplary HIV/AIDS therapeutics, and Table 99 discloses Exemplary HIV Antivirals with their corresponding U.S. patent numbers.

TABLE 98 Exemplary HIV/AIDS Therapeutics

Code Generic Brand Therapeutic Mechanism of Action Highest Phase Name Name Name Group Group Organization Launched- AZT Azidothymidine AZTEC Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline 1987 BW-A509U Zidovudine Retrovir Transcriptase (Originator) Cpd S Inhibitors Launched- NSC- Dideoxycytidine Hivid Anti-HIV Agents Reverse National Cancer 1992 606170 Transcriptase Institute (US) Inhibitors (Originator) Ro-24- Zalcitabine Roche 2027/000 Ro-242027 ddC ddCyd Launched- BMY-27857 Sanilvudine Zerit Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Bristol-Myers 1994 Transcriptase Squibb Inhibitors (Originator) DTH Stavudine Chemical INSERM Delivery (Originator) Systems d4T ddeThd Launched- BMY-40900 Didanosine Videx Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Bristol-Myers 1991 Transcriptase Squibb Inhibitors (Originator) DDI Dideoxyinosine Bristol-Myers Squibb (Orphan Drug) NSC- 612049 d2I ddIno Launched- rIL-2 Aldesleukin Macrolin Anti-HIV Agents IL-2 Chiron 1989 (Originator) rhIL-2 Recombinant Proleukin Breast Cancer Nat. Inst. Allergy interleukin-2 Therapy & Infectious Dis. Immunostimulants Leukemia Therapy Melanoma Therapy Myelodysplastic Syndrome Therapy Myeloid Leukemia Therapy Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma Therapy Renal Cancer Therapy Launched- R-56 Saquinavir Fortovase Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Chugai 1995 mesilate Inhibitors Pharmaceutical (Originator) Ro-31- Invirase Chugai 8959/003 Pharmaceutical (Orphan Drug) Fortovase Roche (soft gel (Originator) capsules) Launched- Human Alferon Anti- Guangdong 1989 leukocyte LDO Cytomegalovirus interferon alpha Drugs Interferon alfa-n3 Alferon N Anti-HIV Agents HemispheRx (human Gel leukocyte derived) Alferon N Anti-Hepatitis C Interferon Injection Virus Drugs Sciences (Originator) Altemol Anti-Papilloma Virus Drugs Cellferon Antiviral Drugs Genital Warts, Treatment for Multiple Sclerosis, Agents for Oncolytic Drugs Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS), Treatment of Treatment of Female Sexual Dysfunction Launched- BI-RG-587 Nevirapine Viramune Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Boehringer 1996 Transcriptase Ingelheim Inhibitors (Originator) BIRG-0587 Nippon Boehringer Ingelheim Roxane Launched- 1592U89 Abacavir Ziagen Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline 1999 sulfate sulfate Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors GlaxoSmithKline (Orphan Drug) Phase I/II CD4-IgG CD4- AIDS Medicines Genentech Immunoadhesin (Originator) rCD4-IgG Recombinant Immunomodulators Nat. Inst. Allergy CD4- & Infectious Dis. immunoglobulin G Recombinant soluble CD4- immunoglobulin G Launched- (−)-BCH-189 Lamivudine 3TC Agents for Liver Reverse GlaxoSmithKline 1995 Cirrhosis Transcriptase (−)-SddC Epivir Anti-HIV Agents Inhibitors Shire BioChem (Originator) 3TC Epivir- Anti-Hepatitis B HBV Virus Drugs GG-714 Heptodin GR- Heptovir 109714X BCH-790 Lamivir (fomer code) Zeffix Zefix Phase II KNI-272 Kynostatin-272 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Japan Energy Inhibitors (Originator) NSC- 651714 Launched- (−)-FTC Emtricitabine Coviracil Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Emory University 2003 Transcriptase (Originator) 524W91 Emtriva Anti-Hepatitis B Inhibitors Gilead Virus Drugs BW- Japan Tobacco 524W91 Launched- U-90152S Delavirdine Rescriptor Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Agouron 1997 mesilate Transcriptase Pfizer Inhibitors (Originator) Pfizer (Orphan Drug) Pre-Registered AG-1661 HIV-1 Remune AIDS Vaccines Immune Immunogen Response (Originator) RG-83894 Roemmers RG-83894- Trinity Medical 103 Group Launched- L-735524 Indinavir sulfate Crixivan Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Banyu 1996 Inhibitors MK-639 Merck & Co. (Originator) Phase I phAZT Azidothymidine Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Russian phosphonate Transcriptase Academy of Inhibitors Sciences (Originator) Nicavir Phosphazid Phase II NSC- (+)-Calanolide A Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Advanced Life 675451 Transcriptase Sciences Inhibitors NSC-664737 Calanolide A Treatment of Sarawak (racemate) Tuberculosis MediChem US Department of Health & Human Services (Originator) Phase II 5A8 Anti-HIV Agents Anti-CD4 Biogen Idec (Originator) Hu-5A8 Humanized Tanox Monoclonal Antibodies TNX-355 Viral Entry Inhibitors Launched- 141W94 Amprenavir Agenerase Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease GlaxoSmithKline 1999 KVX-478 Prozei Inhibitors Kissei VX-478 Vertex (Originator) Launched- DMP-266 Efavirenz Stocrin Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Banyu 1998 Transcriptase Inhibitors L-743726 Sustiva Banyu (Orphan Drug) L-743725 Bristol-Myers ((+)- Squibb enantiomer) (Originator) L-741211 (racemate) Launched- A-84538 Ritonavir Norvir Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Abbott 1996 Inhibitors (Originator) ABT-538 Dainippon Pharmaceutical Launched- AG-1343 Nelfinavir Viracept Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Agouron 1997 mesilate Inhibitors (Originator) LY-312857 Japan Tobacco AG-1346 Mitsubishi (free base) Pharma Roche Phase III PRO-2000 Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Indevus Inhibitors PRO-2000/5 Microbicides Medical Research Council Paligent (Originator) Phase III Gd-Tex Gadolinium Xcytrin Anti-HIV Agents National Cancer texaphyrin Institute GdT2B2 Motexafin Antineoplastic Pharmacyclics gadolinium Enhancing (Originator) Agents PCI-0120 Brain Cancer Therapy Glioblastoma MultiformeTherapy Head and Neck Cancer Therapy Lung Cancer Therapy Lymphocytic Leukemia Therapy Multiple Myeloma Therapy Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma Therapy Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer Therapy Radiosensitizers Renal Cancer Therapy Solid Tumors Therapy Launched- DP-178 Enfuvirtide Fuzeon Anti-HIV Agents Viral Fusion Duke University 2003 Inhibitors (Originator) R-698 Pentafuside Roche T-20 Trimeris (Originator) Phase II BC-IL Buffy coat MultiKine AIDS Medicines Cel-Sci interleukins (Originator) Cancer University of Immunotherapy Maryland Cervical Cancer Therapy Head and Neck Cancer Therapy Prostate Cancer Therapy Phase II FP-21399 Anti-HIV Agents Viral Fusion EMD Lexigen Inhibitors (Originator) Fuji Photo Film (Originator) Phase II AXD-455 Semapimod Anti-HIV Agents Deoxyhypusine Axxima hydrochloride Synthase Inhibitors CNI-1493 Antipsoriatics Mitogen- Cytokine Activated PharmaSciences Protein Kinase (MAPK) Inhibitors Inflammatory Nitric Oxide Picower Institute Bowel Disease, Synthase for Medical Agents for Inhibitors Research (Originator) Pancreatic Disorders, Treatment of Renal Cancer Therapy Phase II ALVAC AIDS Vaccines ANRS MN120 TMGMP ALVAC Merck & Co. vCP205 vCP205 Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Sanofi Pasteur (Originator) Virogenetics (Originator) Walter Reed Army Institute Phase I/II CY-2301 Theradigm- AIDS Vaccines Epimmune HIV (Originator) EP HIV-1090 DNA Vaccines IDM EP-1090 Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. National Institutes of Health Phase II CD4-IgG2 Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Epicyte Inhibitors PRO-542 Formatech GTC Biotherapeutics Progenics (Originator) Phase I UC-781 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Biosyn Transcriptase Inhibitors Microbicides Cellegy Uniroyal (Originator) University of Pittsburgh (Originator) Preclinical ProVax AIDS Vaccines Progenics (Originator) Phase II ACH- Elvucitabine Anti-HIV Agents DNA Achillion 126443 Polymerase Inhibitors L-D4FC Anti-Hepatitis B Reverse Vion Virus Drugs Transcriptase Inhibitors beta-L-Fd4C Yale University (Originator) Preclinical CV-N Cyanovirin N Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Biosyn Inhibitors Microbicides National Cancer Institute (US) (Originator) Launched- PNU- Tipranavir Aptivus Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Boehringer 2005 140690 Inhibitors Ingelheim U-140690 Pfizer (Originator) PNU- 140690E (diNa salt) Phase I/II ADA Azodicarbonamide Anti-HIV Agents National Cancer Institute (US) (Originator) NSC- Rega Institute for 674447 Medical Research (Originator) Launched- Bis(POC)PM Tenofovir Viread AIDS Medicines Reverse Gilead 2001 PA disoproxil Transcriptase (Originator) fumarate Inhibitors GS-4331-05 Anti-HIV Agents Japan Tobacco Japan Tobacco (Orphan Drug) Phase II PA-457 Anti-HIV Agents Viral Biotech Maturation Research Inhibitors Laboratories (Originator) YK-FH312 Panacos University North Carolina, Chapel Hill (Originator) ViroLogic Phase II SP-01 Anticort Anti-HIV Agents HMG-CoA Altachem Reductase mRNA Expression Inhibitors SP-01A Oncolytic Drugs Viral Entry Georgetown Inhibitors University (Originator) Samaritan Pharmaceuticals Launched- BMS-232632- Atazanavir Reyataz Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Bristol-Myers 2003 05 sulfate Inhibitors Squibb CGP-73547 Bristol-Myers Squibb (Orphan Drug) BMS-232632 Novartis (free base) (Originator) Launched- AZT/3TC Lamivudine/Zidovudine Combivir Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline 1997 Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Zidovudine/Lamivudine Phase III AIDSVAX AIDS Vaccines Genentech B/B (Originator) AIDSVAX Nat. Inst. Allergy gp120 B/B & Infectious Dis. VaxGen Phase II (−)-BCH- Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Avexa 10652 Transcriptase (−)-dOTC Inhibitors Shire Pharmaceuticals (Originator) AVX-754 BCH-10618 SPD-754 Phase II D-D4FC Reverset Anti-HIV Agents DNA Bristol-Myers Polymerase Squibb Inhibitors (Originator) DPC-817 Reverse Incyte Transcriptase Inhibitors RVT Pharmasset beta-D- D4FC Phase I/II VIR-201 AIDS Vaccines Virax (Originator) Preclinical DDE-46 Anti-HIV Agents Antimitotic Paradigm Drugs Pharmaceuticals WHI-07 Oncolytic Drugs Apoptosis Parker Hughes Inducers Institute (Originator) Vaginal Caspase 3 Spermicides Activators Caspase 8 Activators Caspase 9 Activators Microtubule inhibitors Preclinical HI-113 Sampidine Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Parker Hughes Transcriptase Institute Inhibitors (Originator) STAMP Stampidine d4T- pBPMAP Preclinical WHI-05 Anti-HIV Agents Paradigm Pharmaceuticals Vaginal Parker Hughes Spermicides Institute (Originator) Preclinical 1F7 Anti-HIV Agents Murine ImmPheron Monoclonal CTB-1 Anti-Hepatitis C Antibodies Immune Network Virus Drugs MAb 1F7 InNexus Sidney Kimmel Cancer Center (Originator) University of British Columbia IND Filed MDI-P Anti-HIV Agents Dana-Farber Cancer Institute Antibacterial Medical Drugs Discoveries (Originator) Asthma Therapy Cystic Fibrosis, Treatment of Septic Shock, Treatment of Phase I PA-14 Anti-HIV Agents Anti-CD195 Epicyte (CCR5) PRO-140 Humanized Progenics Monoclonal (Originator) Antibodies Viral Entry Protein Design Inhibitors Labs Phase II EpiBr Immunitin Anti-HIV Agents Colthurst (Originator) HE-2000 Inactivin Anti-Hepatitis B Edenland Virus Drugs Anti-Hepatitis C Hollis-Eden Virus Drugs (Originator) Antimalarials Cystic Fibrosis, Treatment of Immunomodulators Treatment of Tuberculosis Phase II ALVAC AIDS Vaccines ANRS vCP1452 vCP1452 Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Sanofi Pasteur (Originator) Virogenetics (Originator) Phase II (±)-FTC Racivir Anti-HIV Agents Pharmasset (Originator) PSI-5004 Anti-Hepatitis B Virus Drugs Phase III Cellulose Female Viral Entry Polydex sulfate Contraceptives Inhibitors (Originator) Ushercell Microbicides Phase I SF-2 rgp120 AIDS Vaccines Chiron (Originator) rgp120 SF-2 Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Phase I MIV-150 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Medivir Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Microbicides Population Council Phase I/II Cytolin Anti-HIV Agents Anti- Amerimmune CD11a/CD18 (Originator) (LFA-1) Murine Cytodyn Monoclonal Antibodies Phase III 10D1 mAb Anti-HIV Agents Anti-CD152 Bristol-Myers (CTLA-4) Squibb Anti-CTLA-4 Breast Cancer Human Medarex MAb Therapy Monoclonal (Originator) Antibodies MDX-010 Head and Neck Medarex Cancer Therapy (Orphan Drug) MDX- Melanoma National Cancer CTLA4 Therapy Institute MDX-101 Prostate Cancer (formerly) Therapy Renal Cancer Therapy Phase II/III 1018-ISS AIDS Medicines Oligonucleotides Dynavax (Originator) ISS-1018 Antiallergy/Antiasthmatic Gilead Drugs Drugs for Sanofi Pasteur Allergic Rhinitis Immunomodulators Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma Therapy Vaccine adjuvants Phase I/II HGTV43 Stealth Anti-HIV Agents Enzo (Originator) Vector Gene Delivery Systems Phase II R-147681 Dapivirine Anti-HIV Agents Reverse IPM Transcriptase Inhibitors TMC-120 Microbicides Janssen (Originator) Tibotec (Originator) Phase II DPC-083 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Bristol-Myers Transcriptase Squibb Inhibitors (Originator) Launched- Lamivudine/zidovudine/ Trizivir Anti-HIV Agents GlaxoSmithKline 2000 abacavir (Originator) sulfate Launched- 908 Fosamprenavir Lexiva Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease GlaxoSmithKline 2003 calcium Inhibitors (Originator) GW- Telzir Chemical Vertex 433908G Delivery (Originator) Systems GW-433908 (free acid) VX-175 (free acid) Phase I DNA HIV AIDS Vaccines GlaxoSmithKline vaccine PowderJect HIV PowderMed DNA vaccine (Originator) Phase III PC-515 Carraguard Microbicides Population Council (Originator) Phase II R-165335 Etravirine Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Janssen Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors TMC-125 Tibotec (Originator) Preclinical SP-1093V Anti-HIV Agents DNA McGill University Polymerase Inhibitors Reverse Supratek Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Phase III AIDSVAX AIDS Vaccines Genentech B/E (Originator) AIDSVAX VaxGen gp120 B/E Walter Reed Army Institute Launched- ABT-378/r Lopinavir/ritonavir Kaletra Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Abbott 2000 Inhibitors (Originator) ABT- Severe Acute Gilead 378/ritonavir Respiratory Syndrome (SARS), Treatment of Phase I BCH-13520 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Shire Transcriptase Pharmaceuticals Inhibitors (Originator) SPD-756 Phase I/II BAY-50- Adargileukin Anti-HIV Agents IL-2 Bayer 4798 alfa Immunomodulators (Originator) Oncolytic Drugs Phase I 204937 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline Transcriptase Inhibitors MIV-210 Anti-Hepatitis B Medivir Virus Drugs (Originator) Phase III BufferGel Microbicides Johns Hopkins University (Originator) Vaginal National Spermicides Institutes of Health ReProtect (Originator) Phase I Ad5-FLgag AIDS Vaccines Merck & Co. (Originator) Ad5-gag DNA Vaccines Phase III ALVAC AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy E120TMG & Infectious Dis. ALVAC Sanofi Pasteur vCP1521 (Originator) vCP1521 Virogenetics (Originator) Walter Reed Army Institute Phase II MVA-BN AIDS Vaccines Bavarian Nordic Nef (Originator) MVA-HIV-1 LAI-nef MVA-nef Phase I DNA/MVA Multiprotein AIDS Vaccines Emory University SHIV-89.6 DNA/MVA (Originator) vaccine GeoVax Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Phase II MVA.HIVA AIDS Vaccines Impfstoffwerk Dessau-Tornau GmbH (Originator) International AIDS Vaccine Initiative Uganda Virus Research Institute University of Oxford Phase I LFn-p24 HIV-Therapore AIDS Vaccines Avant vaccine (Originator) Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Walter Reed Army Institute Phase III C31G Glyminox Oramed Anti-HIV Agents Biosyn (Originator) SAVVY Antibacterial Cellegy Drugs Antifungal Agents Microbicides Treatment of Opportunistic Infections Vaginal Spermicides Phase I BRI-7013 VivaGel Microbicides Biomolecular Research Institute (Originator) SPL-7013 Starpharma Phase I/II SDS Sodium dodecyl Invisible Anti-HIV Agents Universite Laval sulfate Condom (Originator) SLS Sodium lauryl Anti-Herpes sulfate Simplex Virus Drugs Antiviral Drugs Microbicides Vaginal Spermicides Phase I/II 2F5 Anti-HIV Agents Human Epicyte Monoclonal Antibodies Viral Entry Polymun Inhibitors (Originator) Universitaet Wien (Originator) Phase I AK-671 Ancriviroc Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine Schering-Plough CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists SCH- Viral Entry 351125 Inhibitors SCH-C Schering C Phase I DNA/PLG AIDS Vaccines Chiron microparticles (Originator) DNA Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Phase I AAV2-gag- AIDS Vaccines International PR-DELTA- AIDS Vaccine RT Initiative tgAAC-09 DNA Vaccines Targeted Genetics (Originator) tgAAC09 AAV Phase I AVX-101 AIDS Vaccines AlphaVax (Originator) AVX-101 DNA Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy VEE & Infectious Dis. Phase I gp160 AIDS Vaccines ANRS MN/LAI-2 Sanofi Pasteur (Originator) Walter Reed Army Institute Preclinical THPB 2-OH-propyl- Trappsol Anti-HIV Agents Cyclodextrin beta- HPB Technologies cyclodextrin Development O-(2- (Originator) Hydroxypropyl)- beta- cyclodextrin Preclinical MPI-49839 Anti-HIV Agents Myriad Genetics (Originator) Phase I BMS- Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Bristol-Myers 378806 Inhibitors Squibb BMS-806 (Originator) Phase I T-cell HIV AIDS Vaccines Hadassah Vaccine Medical Organization (Originator) Weizmann Institute of Science Phase III TMC-114 Darunavir Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Johnson & Inhibitors Johnson UIC-94017 Tibotec (Originator) University of Illinois (Originator) Preclinical MV-026048 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Medivir Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Roche Preclinical K5-N, OS(H) Anti-HIV Agents Angiogenesis Glycores 2000 Inhibitors Microbicides Viral Fusion San Raffaele Inhibitors Scientific Institute Oncolytic Drugs Universita degli Studi di Bari (Originator) Universita degli Studi di Brescia (Originator) Phase III UK-427857 Maraviroc Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine Pfizer CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists Viral Entry Inhibitors Phase I BILR-355 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Boehringer Transcriptase Ingelheim Inhibitors (Originator) BILR-355- BS Launched- Abacavir Epzicom Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline 2004 sulfate/lamivudine Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Kivexa Preclinical DermaVir AIDS Vaccines Genetic Immunity (Originator) DNA Vaccines Research Institute Genetic Human Ther. Phase I/II 2G12 Anti-HIV Agents Human Epicyte Monoclonal Antibodies Viral Entry Polymun Inhibitors (Originator) Universitaet Wien (Originator) Phase I L- Anti-HIV Agents HIV Integrase Merck & Co. 000870810 Inhibitors (Originator) L-870810 Phase I L-870812 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Integrase Merck & Co. Inhibitors (Originator) Phase I VRX-496 Anti-HIV Agents University of Pennsylvania Antisense VIRxSYS Therapy (Originator) Preclinical SAMMA Microbicides Viral Entry Mount Sinai Inhibitors School of Medicine (Originator) Rush University Medical Center (Originator) Phase I Ad5gag2 AIDS Vaccines Merck & Co. (Originator) MRKAd5 Nat. Inst. Allergy HIV-1 gag & Infectious Dis. MRKAd5gag Sanofi Pasteur Phase I BG-777 Anti- Virocell Cytomegalovirus (Originator) Drugs Anti-HIV Agents Anti-Influenza Virus Drugs Antibacterial Drugs Immunomodulators Preclinical Sulphonated Contraceptives Panjab Hesperidin Microbicides University (Originator) Phase II 695634 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors GW-5634 GW-695634 Phase II GW-678248 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse GlaxoSmithKline Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors GW-8248 Preclinical R-1495 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Medivir Transcriptase Inhibitors Roche Preclinical SMP-717 Anti- Reverse Advanced Life Cytomegalovirus Transcriptase Sciences Drugs Inhibitors (Originator) Anti-HIV Agents Phase I/II AMD-070 Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine AnorMED CXCR4 (SDF- (Originator) 1) Antagonists Viral Entry Nat. Inst. Allergy Inhibitors & Infectious Dis. National Institutes of Health Preclinical TGF-alpha Anti-HIV Agents Centocor Antiparkinsonian Kaleidos Pharma Drugs National Cancer Institute (US) (Originator) National Institutes of Health (Originator) Phase II 873140 Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine GlaxoSmithKline CCR5 Antagonists AK-602 Viral Entry Ono (Originator) Inhibitors GW-873140 ONO-4128 Phase I TAK-220 Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine Takeda CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists Viral Entry Inhibitors Launched V-1 Immunitor AIDS Vaccines Immunitor (Originator) Treatment of AIDS-Associated Disorders Phase I TAK-652 Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine Takeda CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists Viral Entry Inhibitors IND Filed R15K BlockAide/ Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Adventrx CR Inhibitors Pharmaceuticals M. D. Anderson Cancer Center (Originator) Phase II R-278474 Rilpivirine Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Janssen Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors TMC-278 Preclinical KPC-2 Anti-HIV Agents Kucera Pharmaceutical (Originator) Preclinical INK-20 Anti-HIV Agents Kucera Pharmaceutical (Originator) Chemical Delivery Systems Phase I CCR5 mAb Anti-HIV Agents Anti-CD195 Human Genome (CCR5) Sciences (Originator) CCR5mAb004 Human Monoclonal Antibodies Viral Entry Inhibitors Preclinical MIV-170 Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Medivir Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Phase I DP6-001 HIV DNA AIDS Vaccines Advanced vaccine BioScience DNA Vaccines CytRx University of Massachusetts (Originator) Phase II AG-001859 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Pfizer Inhibitors (Originator) AG-1859 Phase I/II GTU- AIDS Vaccines FIT Biotech MultiHIV (Originator) DNA Vaccines International AIDS Vaccine Initiative Preclinical EradicAide AIDS Vaccines Adventrx Pharmaceuticals M. D. Anderson Cancer Center (Originator) Launched- Tenofovir Truvada Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Gilead 2004 disoproxil Transcriptase (Originator) fumarate/emtricitabine Inhibitors Japan Tobacco Preclinical BlockAide/VP Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Adventrx Inhibitors Pharmaceuticals (Originator) Preclinical TPFA Thiovir Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Adventrx Transcriptase Pharmaceuticals Inhibitors Cervical Cancer National Cancer Therapy Institute Genital Warts, University of Treatment for Southern California (Originator) Phase I/II MetX MetaboliteX Anti-HIV Agents Tripep (Originator) alpha-HGA Preclinical NV-05A Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Idenix Transcriptase (Originator) Inhibitors Phase I/II IR-103 AIDS Vaccines Immune Response Preclinical MX-100 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Pharmacor Inhibitors (Originator) PL-100 Procyon Biopharma (Originator) ViroLogic Phase I Anti-HIV Agents Fresenius (Originator) Gene Therapy Georg-Speyer- Haus (Originator) Phase I SCH-D Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine Schering-Plough CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists Sch-417690 Viral Entry Inhibitors Preclinical ImmunoVex- AIDS Vaccines BioVex HIV (Originator) Phase I CYT-99-007 Anti-HIV Agents Cytheris (Originator) rhIL-7 Immunomodulators Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. National Cancer Institute Phase I recombinant o- AIDS Vaccines Chiron gp140/MF59 (Originator) adjuvant Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Phase II BMS- Anti-HIV Agents Viral Entry Bristol-Myers 488043 Inhibitors Squibb (Originator) Preclinical KP-1212 Anti-HIV Agents Koronis (Originator) SN-1212 Preclinical AMD-887 Anti-HIV Agents Chemokine AnorMED CCR5 (Originator) Antagonists Viral Entry Inhibitors Phase I KP-1461 Anti-HIV Agents Koronis (Originator) SN-1461 Chemical Delivery Systems Preclinical DES-10 Anti-HIV Agents AusAm Biotechnologies (Originator) Anti-Herpes National Virus Drugs Institutes of Health Preclinical APP-069 Anti-HIV Agents Aphios (Originator) Preclinical PC-815 MIV- Anti-HIV Agents Medivir 150/Carraguard (Originator) MIV-150/PC- Microbicides Population 515 Council (Originator) Preclinical FGI-345 Anti-HIV Agents Functional Genetics (Originator) Preclinical RPI-MN Anti-HIV Agents Nutra Pharma (Originator) ReceptoPharm (Originator) Preclinical Tenofovir Anti-HIV Agents Reverse Bristol-Myers disoproxil Transcriptase Squibb fumarate/emtricitabine/ Inhibitors (Originator) efavirenz Gilead (Originator) Merck & Co. (Originator) Preclinical MVA-BN HIV AIDS Vaccines Bavarian Nordic Polytope (Originator) Preclinical MVA-BN HIV AIDS Vaccines Bavarian Nordic Multiantigen (Originator) Preclinical PBS-119 Immunostimulants Phoenix Biosciences (Originator) Phase II HIV-1 Tat Toxoid AIDS Vaccines Neovacs vaccine Tat Toxoid Sanofi Pasteur vaccine Univ. Maryland Biotechnology Institute Phase III TNP Thymus nuclear Anti-HIV Agents Viral Genetics VGV-1 protein Phase I VCR-ADV- AIDS Vaccines GenVec 014 (Originator) VRC- Nat. Inst. Allergy HIVADV014- & Infectious Dis. 00-VP Preclinical SP-010 Anti-HIV Agents Georgetown University (Originator) SP-10 Cognition Samaritan Disorders, Pharmaceuticals Treatment of Phase I/II GS-9137 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Integrase Gilead Inhibitors JTK-303 Japan Tobacco (Originator) Phase I/II RNA-loaded AIDS Vaccines Argos dendritic cell Cancer Vaccines Therapeutics vaccine (Originator) Melanoma Therapy Renal Cancer Therapy Phase I IFN-alpha Antiferon AIDS Vaccines Neovacs kinoid (Originator) Systemic Lupus Sanofi Pasteur Erythematosus, Agents for Vaccines Phase II DNA.HIVA AIDS Vaccines International AIDS Vaccine Initiative HIVA DNA Vaccines ML Laboratories (Originator) Uganda Virus Research Institute University of Oxford Phase I DEBIO-025 Anti-HIV Agents Debiopharm (Originator) UNIL-025 Anti-Hepatitis C Virus Drugs Ischemic Stroke, Treatment of Preclinical HIV vaccine AIDS Vaccines Bema Biotech (Originator) MV-HIV vaccine Phase I 825780 DNA Vaccines GlaxoSmithKline (Originator) Viral Vaccines Phase I C-1605 AIDS Medicines Merck & Co. (Originator) Phase I ADMVA AIDS Vaccines Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Center Impfstoffwerk Dessau-Tornau GmbH (Originator) International AIDS Vaccine Initiative Preclinical BL-1050 AIDS Medicines BioLineRx Hebrew University (Originator) Yissum Phase I CAP Cellulose Microbicides Viral Entry New York Blood acetate Inhibitors Center phthalate Vaginal Spermicides Preclinical QR-437 Anti-HIV Agents Quigley Pharma (Originator) Phase II MRKAd5 AIDS Vaccines Merck & Co. HIV-1 (Originator) gag/pol/nef MRKAd5 Nat. Inst. Allergy HIV-1 & Infectious Dis. trivalent MRKAd5gag/ pol/nef Preclinical CarryVac- AIDS Vaccines Tripep HIV (Originator) Vaccine Research Institute of San Diego Preclinical HIV-RAS AIDS Medicines Tripep (Originator) Preclinical PL-337 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Procyon Inhibitors Biopharma (Originator) Phase I DNA-C AIDS Vaccines EuroVacc Foundation DNA-HIV-C Universitaet Regensburg (Originator) Phase II Lipo-5 AIDS Vaccines ANRS INSERM (Originator) Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Sanofi Pasteur (Originator) Phase I Lipo-6T AIDS Vaccines ANRS INSERM (Originator) Sanofi Pasteur (Originator) Phase I EnvPro AIDS Vaccines St. Jude Children's Res. Hosp. (Originator) Phase I TCB-M358 AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Therion (Originator) Phase I TBC-M335 AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Therion (Originator) Phase I TBC-F357 AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Therion (Originator) Phase I TBC-F349 AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy & Infectious Dis. Therion (Originator) Phase I TBC- AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy M358/TBC- & Infectious Dis. M355 Therion (Originator) Phase I TBC- AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy F357/TBC- & Infectious Dis. F349 Therion (Originator) Phase I HIV CTL Multiepitope CTL AIDS Vaccines Nat. Inst. Allergy MEP peptide vaccine & Infectious Dis. Wyeth Pharmaceuticals (Originator) Phase I VRC-DNA- AIDS Vaccines National 009 Institutes of Health (Originator) VRC- DNA Vaccines HIVDNA009- 00-VP Preclinical REP-9 Anti-HIV Agents Oligonucleotides REPLICor (Originator) Antiviral Drugs Preclinical PPL-100 Anti-HIV Agents HIV Protease Procyon Inhibitors Biopharma (Originator) Chemical Delivery Systems Phase I/II BI-201 Anti-HIV Agents Human BioInvent Monoclonal (Originator) Antibodies

TABLE 99 Exemplary HIV Antivirals and Patent Numbers Ziagen (Abacavir sulfate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,394) Epzicom (Abacavir sulfate/lamivudine, U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,394) Hepsera (Adefovir dipivoxil, U.S. Pat. No. 4,724,233) Agenerase (Amprenavir, U.S. Pat. No. 5,646,180) Reyataz (Atazanavir sulfate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,911) Rescriptor (Delavirdine mesilate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,563,142) Hivid (Dideoxycytidine; Zalcitabine, U.S. Pat. No. 5,028,595) Videx (Dideoxyinosine; Didanosine, U.S. Pat. No. 4,861,759) Sustiva (Efavirenz, U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,021) Emtriva (Emtricitabine, U.S. Pat. No. 6,642,245) Lexiva (Fosamprenavir calcium, U.S. Pat. No. 6,436,989) Virudin; Triapten; Foscavir (Foscarnet sodium, U.S. Pat. No. 6,476,009) Crixivan (Indinavir sulfate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,413,999) Epivir (Lamivudine, U.S. Pat. No. 5 047,407) Combivir (Lamivudine/Zidovudine, U.S. Pat. No. 4,724,232) Aluviran (Lopinavir) Kaletra (Lopinavir/ritonavir, U.S. Pat. No. 5,541,206) Viracept (Nelfinavir mesilate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,484,926) Viramune (Nevirapine, U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,972) Norvir (Ritonavir, U.S. Pat. No. 5,541,206) Invirase; Fortovase (Saquinavir mesilate, U.S. Pat. No. 5,196,438) Zerit (Stavudine, U.S. Pat. No. 4,978,655) Truvada (Tenofovir disoproxil fumarate/emtricitabine, U.S. Pat. No. 5,210,085) Aptivus (Tipranavir) Retrovir (Zidovudine; Azidothymidine, U.S. Pat. No. 4,724,232)

Metabolites of the Compounds of the Invention

Also falling within the scope of this invention are the in vivo metabolic products of the compounds described herein. Such products may result for example from the oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, esterification and the like of the administered compound, primarily due to enzymatic processes. Accordingly, the invention includes compounds produced by a process comprising contacting a compound of this invention with a mammal for a period of time sufficient to yield a metabolic product thereof. Such products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabelled (e.g., C¹⁴ or H³) compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g., greater than about 0.5 mg/kg) to an animal such as rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, or to man, allowing sufficient time for metabolism to occur (typically about 30 seconds to 30 hours) and isolating its conversion products from the urine, blood or other biological samples. These products are easily isolated since they are labeled (others are isolated by the use of antibodies capable of binding epitopes surviving in the metabolite). The metabolite structures are determined in conventional fashion, e.g., by MS or NMR analysis. In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well-known to those skilled in the art. The conversion products, so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention even if they possess no HIV-inhibitory activity of their own.

Recipes and methods for determining stability of compounds in surrogate gastrointestinal secretions are known. Compounds are defined herein as stable in the gastrointestinal tract where less than about 50 mole percent of the protected groups are deprotected in surrogate intestinal or gastric juice upon incubation for 1 hour at 37° C. Simply because the compounds are stable to the gastrointestinal tract does not mean that they cannot be hydrolyzed in vivo. The phosphonate prodrugs of the invention typically will be stable in the digestive system but are substantially hydrolyzed to the parental drug in the digestive lumen, liver or other metabolic organ, or within cells in general.

Exemplary Methods of Making the Compounds of the Invention.

The invention also relates to methods of making the compositions of the invention. The compositions are prepared by any of the applicable techniques of organic synthesis. Many such techniques are well known in the art. However, many of the known techniques are elaborated in Compendium of Organic Synthetic Methods (John Wiley & Sons, New York), Vol. 1, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1971; Vol. 2, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1974; Vol. 3, Louis S. Hegedus and Leroy Wade, 1977; Vol. 4, Leroy G. Wade, jr., 1980; Vol. 5, Leroy G. Wade, Jr., 1984; and Vol. 6, Michael B. Smith; as well as March, J., Advanced Organic Chemistry, Third Edition, (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1985), Comprehensive Organic Synthesis. Selectivity, Strategy & Efficiency in Modern Organic Chemistry. In 9 Volumes, Barry M. Trost, Editor-in-Chief (Pergamon Press, New York, 1993 printing).

A number of exemplary methods for the preparation of the compositions of the invention are provided below. These methods are intended to illustrate the nature of such preparations and are not intended to limit the scope of applicable methods.

Generally, the reaction conditions such as temperature, reaction time, solvents, work-up procedures, and the like, will be those common in the art for the particular reaction to be performed. The cited reference material, together with material cited therein, contains detailed descriptions of such conditions. Typically the temperatures will be −100° C. to 200° C., solvents will be aprotic or protic, and reaction times will be 10 seconds to 10 days. Work-up typically consists of quenching any unreacted reagents followed by partition between a water/organic layer system (extraction) and separating the layer containing the product.

Oxidation and reduction reactions are typically carried out at temperatures near room temperature (about 20° C.), although for metal hydride reductions frequently the temperature is reduced to 0° C. to −100° C., solvents are typically aprotic for reductions and may be either protic or aprotic for oxidations. Reaction times are adjusted to achieve desired conversions.

Condensation reactions are typically carried out at temperatures near room temperature, although for non-equilibrating, kinetically controlled condensations reduced temperatures (0° C. to −100° C.) are also common. Solvents can be either protic (common in equilibrating reactions) or aprotic (common in kinetically controlled reactions).

Standard synthetic techniques such as azeotropic removal of reaction by-products and use of anhydrous reaction conditions (e.g., inert gas environments) are common in the art and will be applied when applicable.

Schemes and Examples

General aspects of these exemplary methods are described below and in the Examples. Each of the products of the following processes is optionally separated, isolated, and/or purified prior to its use in subsequent processes.

Generally, the reaction conditions such as temperature, reaction time, solvents, work-up procedures, and the like, will be those common in the art for the particular reaction to be performed. The cited reference material, together with material cited therein, contains detailed descriptions of such conditions. Typically the temperatures will be −100° C. to 200° C., solvents will be aprotic or protic, and reaction times will be 10 seconds to 10 days. Work-up typically consists of quenching any unreacted reagents followed by partition between a water/organic layer system (extraction) and separating the layer containing the product.

Oxidation and reduction reactions are typically carried out at temperatures near room temperature (about 20° C.), although for metal hydride reductions frequently the temperature is reduced to 0° C. to −100° C., solvents are typically aprotic for reductions and may be either protic or aprotic for oxidations. Reaction times are adjusted to achieve desired conversions.

Condensation reactions are typically carried out at temperatures near room temperature, although for non-equilibrating, kinetically controlled condensations reduced temperatures (0° C. to −100° C.) are also common. Solvents can be either protic (common in equilibrating reactions) or aprotic (common in kinetically controlled reactions).

Standard synthetic techniques such as azeotropic removal of reaction by-products and use of anhydrous reaction conditions (e.g., inert gas environments) are common in the art and will be applied when applicable.

The terms “treated”, “treating”, “treatment”, and the like, when used in connection with a chemical synthetic operation, mean contacting, mixing, reacting, allowing to react, bringing into contact, and other terms common in the art for indicating that one or more chemical entities is treated in such a manner as to convert it to one or more other chemical entities. This means that “treating compound one with compound two” is synonymous with “allowing compound one to react with compound two”, “contacting compound one with compound two”, “reacting compound one with compound two”, and other expressions common in the art of organic synthesis for reasonably indicating that compound one was “treated”, “reacted”, “allowed to react”, etc., with compound two. For example, treating indicates the reasonable and usual manner in which organic chemicals are allowed to react. Normal concentrations (0.01M to 10M, typically 0.1M to 1M), temperatures (−100° C. to 250° C., typically −78° C. to 150° C., more typically −78° C. to 100° C., still more typically 0° C. to 100° C.), reaction vessels (typically glass, plastic, metal), solvents, pressures, atmospheres (typically air for oxygen and water insensitive reactions or nitrogen or argon for oxygen or water sensitive), etc., are intended unless otherwise indicated. The knowledge of similar reactions known in the art of organic synthesis are used in selecting the conditions and apparatus for “treating” in a given process. In particular, one of ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis selects conditions and apparatus reasonably expected to successfully carry out the chemical reactions of the described processes based on the knowledge in the art.

Modifications of each of the exemplary schemes and in the examples (hereafter “exemplary schemes”) leads to various analogs of the specific exemplary materials produce. The above-cited citations describing suitable methods of organic synthesis are applicable to such modifications.

In each of the exemplary schemes it may be advantageous to separate reaction products from one another and/or from starting materials. The desired products of each step or series of steps is separated and/or purified (hereinafter separated) to the desired degree of homogeneity by the techniques common in the art. Typically such separations involve multiphase extraction, crystallization from a solvent or solvent mixture, distillation, sublimation, or chromatography. Chromatography can involve any number of methods including, for example: reverse-phase and normal phase; size exclusion; ion exchange; high, medium, and low pressure liquid chromatography methods and apparatus; small scale analytical; simulated moving bed (SMB) and preparative thin or thick layer chromatography, as well as techniques of small scale thin layer and flash chromatography.

Another class of separation methods involves treatment of a mixture with a reagent selected to bind to or render otherwise separable a desired product, unreacted starting material, reaction by product, or the like. Such reagents include adsorbents or absorbents such as activated carbon, molecular sieves, ion exchange media, or the like. Alternatively, the reagents can be acids in the case of a basic material, bases in the case of an acidic material, binding reagents such as antibodies, binding proteins, selective chelators such as crown ethers, liquid/liquid ion extraction reagents (LIX), or the like.

Selection of appropriate methods of separation depends on the nature of the materials involved. For example, boiling point, and molecular weight in distillation and sublimation, presence or absence of polar functional groups in chromatography, stability of materials in acidic and basic media in multiphase extraction, and the like. One skilled in the art will apply techniques most likely to achieve the desired separation.

A single stereoisomer, e.g., an enantiomer, substantially free of its stereoisomer may be obtained by resolution of the racemic mixture using a method such as formation of diastereomers using optically active resolving agents (Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds, (1962) by E. L. Eliel, McGraw Hill; Lochmuller, C. H., (1975) J. Chromatogr., 113:(3) 283-302). Racemic mixtures of chiral compounds of the invention can be separated and isolated by any suitable method, including: (1) formation of ionic, diastereomeric salts with chiral compounds and separation by fractional crystallization or other methods, (2) formation of diastereomeric compounds with chiral derivatizing reagents, separation of the diastereomers, and conversion to the pure stereoisomers, and (3) separation of the substantially pure or enriched stereoisomers directly under chiral conditions.

Under method (1), diastereomeric salts can be formed by reaction of enantiomerically pure chiral bases such as brucine, quinine, ephedrine, strychnine, α-methyl-β-phenylethylamine (amphetamine), and the like with asymmetric compounds bearing acidic functionality, such as carboxylic acid and sulfonic acid. The diastereomeric salts may be induced to separate by fractional crystallization or ionic chromatography. For separation of the optical isomers of amino compounds, addition of chiral carboxylic or sulfonic acids, such as camphorsulfonic acid, tartaric acid, mandelic acid, or lactic acid can result in formation of the diastereomeric salts.

Alternatively, by method (2), the substrate to be resolved is reacted with one enantiomer of a chiral compound to form a diastereomeric pair (Eliel, E. and Wilen, S. (1994) Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., p. 322). Diastereomeric compounds can be formed by reacting asymmetric compounds with enantiomerically pure chiral derivatizing reagents, such as menthyl derivatives, followed by separation of the diastereomers and hydrolysis to yield the free, enantiomerically enriched xanthene. A method of determining optical purity involves making chiral esters, such as a menthyl ester, e.g., (−) menthyl chloroformate in the presence of base, or Mosher ester, α-methoxy-α-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl acetate (Jacob III. (1982) J. Org. Chem. 47:4165), of the racemic mixture, and analyzing the NMR spectrum for the presence of the two atropisomeric diastereomers. Stable diastereomers of atropisomeric compounds can be separated and isolated by normal- and reverse-phase chromatography following methods for separation of atropisomeric naphthyl-isoquinolines (Hoye, T., WO 96/15111). By method (3), a racemic mixture of two enantiomers can be separated by chromatography using a chiral stationary phase (Chiral Liquid Chromatography (1989) W. J. Lough, Ed. Chapman and Hall, New York; Okamoto, (1990) J. of Chromatogr. 513:375-378). Enriched or purified enantiomers can be distinguished by methods used to distinguish other chiral molecules with asymmetric carbon atoms, such as optical rotation and circular dichroism.

Examples General Section

A number of exemplary methods for the preparation of compounds of the invention are provided herein, for example, in the Examples hereinbelow. These methods are intended to illustrate the nature of such preparations are not intended to limit the scope of applicable methods. Certain compounds of the invention can be used as intermediates for the preparation of other compounds of the invention. For example, the interconversion of various phosphonate compounds of the invention is illustrated below.

Interconversions of the Phosphonates R-Link-P(O)(OR¹)₂, R-Link-P(O)(OR¹)(OH) and R-Link-P(O)(OH)₂.

The following schemes 32-38 describe the preparation of phosphonate esters of the general structure R-link-P(O)(OR¹)₂, in which the groups R¹ may be the same or different. The R¹ groups attached to a phosphonate ester, or to precursors thereto, may be changed using established chemical transformations. The interconversion reactions of phosphonates are illustrated in Scheme S32. The group R in Scheme 32 represents the substructure, i.e. the drug “scaffold, to which the substituent link-P(O)(OR¹)₂ is attached, either in the compounds of the invention, or in precursors thereto. At the point in the synthetic route of conducting a phosphonate interconversion, certain functional groups in R may be protected. The methods employed for a given phosphonate transformation depend on the nature of the substituent R¹, and of the substrate to which the phosphonate group is attached. The preparation and hydrolysis of phosphonate esters is described in Organic Phosphorus Compounds, G. M. Kosolapoff, L. Maeir, eds, Wiley, 1976, p. 9ff.

In general, synthesis of phosphonate esters is achieved by coupling a nucleophile amine or alcohol with the corresponding activated phosphonate electrophilic precursor. For example, chlorophosphonate addition on to 5′-hydroxy of nucleoside is a well known method for preparation of nucleoside phosphate monoesters. The activated precursor can be prepared by several well known methods. Chlorophosphonates useful for synthesis of the prodrugs are prepared from the substituted-1,3-propanediol (Wissner, et al, (1992) J. Med. Chem. 35:1650). Chlorophosphonates are made by oxidation of the corresponding chlorophospholanes (Anderson, et al, (1984) J. Org. Chem. 49:1304) which are obtained by reaction of the substituted diol with phosphorus trichloride. Alternatively, the chlorophosphonate agent is made by treating substituted-11,3-diols with phosphorusoxychloride (Patois, et al, (1990) J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. I, 1577). Chlorophosphonate species may also be generated in situ from corresponding cyclic phosphites (Silverburg, et al., (1996) Tetrahedron lett., 37:771-774), which in turn can be either made from chlorophospholane or phosphoramidate intermediate. Phosphoroflouridate intermediate prepared either from pyrophosphate or phosphoric acid may also act as precursor in preparation of cyclic prodrugs (Watanabe et al., (1988) Tetrahedron lett., 29:5763-66).

Phosphonate prodrugs of the present invention may also be prepared from the free acid by Mitsunobu reactions (Mitsunobu, (1981) Synthesis, 1; Campbell, (1992) J. Org. Chem. 57:6331), and other acid coupling reagents including, but not limited to, carbodiimides (Alexander, et al, (1994) Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun. 59:1853; Casara et al, (1992) Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 2:145; Ohashi et al, (1988) Tetrahedron Lett., 29:1189), and benzotriazolyloxytris-(dimethylamino)phosphonium salts (Campagne et al (1993) Tetrahedron Lett. 34:6743).

Aryl halides undergo Ni⁺² catalyzed reaction with phosphite derivatives to give aryl phosphonate containing compounds (Balthazar, et al (1980) J. Org. Chem. 45:5425). Phosphonates may also be prepared from the chlorophosphonate in the presence of a palladium catalyst using aromatic triflates (Petrakis et al (1987) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 109:2831; Lu et al (1987) Synthesis 726). In another method, aryl phosphonate esters are prepared from aryl phosphates under anionic rearrangement conditions (Melvin (1981) Tetrahedron Lett. 22:3375; Casteel et al (1991) Synthesis, 691). N-Alkoxy aryl salts with alkali metal derivatives of cyclic alkyl phosphonate provide general synthesis for heteroaryl-2-phosphonate linkers (Redmore (1970) J. Org. Chem. 35:4114). These above mentioned methods can also be extended to compounds where the W⁵ group is a heterocycle. Cyclic-1,3-propanyl prodrugs of phosphonates are also synthesized from phosphonic diacids and substituted propane-1,3-diols using a coupling reagent such as 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) in presence of a base (e.g., pyridine). Other carbodiimide based coupling agents like 1,3-disopropylcarbodiimide or water soluble reagent, 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDCI) can also be utilized for the synthesis of cyclic phosphonate prodrugs.

The conversion of a phosphonate diester S32.1 into the corresponding phosphonate monoester S32.2 (Scheme 32, Reaction 1) is accomplished by a number of methods. For example, the ester S32.1 in which R¹ is an aralkyl group such as benzyl, is converted into the monoester compound S32.2 by reaction with a tertiary organic base such as diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) or quinuclidine, as described in J. Org. Chem. (1995) 60:2946. The reaction is performed in an inert hydrocarbon solvent such as toluene or xylene, at about 110° C. The conversion of the diester S32.1 in which R¹ is an aryl group such as phenyl, or an alkenyl group such as allyl, into the monoester S32.2 is effected by treatment of the ester S32.1 with a base such as aqueous sodium hydroxide in acetonitrile or lithium hydroxide in aqueous tetrahydrofuran. Phosphonate diesters S32.1 in which one of the groups R¹ is aralkyl, such as benzyl, and the other is alkyl, is converted into the monoesters S32.2 in which R¹ is alkyl by hydrogenation, for example using a palladium on carbon catalyst. Phosphonate diesters in which both of the groups R¹ are alkenyl, such as allyl, is converted into the monoester S32.2 in which R¹ is alkenyl, by treatment with chlorotris(triphenylphosphine)rhodium (Wilkinson's catalyst) in aqueous ethanol at reflux, optionally in the presence of diazabicyclooctane, for example by using the procedure described in J. Org. Chem. (1973) 38:3224, for the cleavage of allyl carboxylates.

The conversion of a phosphonate diester S32.1 or a phosphonate monoester S32.2 into the corresponding phosphonic acid S32.3 (Scheme 32, Reactions 2 and 3) can be effected by reaction of the diester or the monoester with trimethylsilyl bromide, as described in J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Comm., (1979) 739. The reaction is conducted in an inert solvent such as, for example, dichloromethane, optionally in the presence of a silylating agent such as bis(trimethylsilyl)trifluoroacetamide, at ambient temperature. A phosphonate monoester S32.2 in which R¹ is aralkyl such as benzyl, is converted into the corresponding phosphonic acid S32.3 by hydrogenation over a palladium catalyst, or by treatment with hydrogen chloride in an ethereal solvent such as dioxane. A phosphonate monoester S32.2 in which R¹ is alkenyl such as, for example, allyl, is converted into the phosphonic acid S32.3 by reaction with Wilkinson's catalyst in an aqueous organic solvent, for example in 15% aqueous acetonitrile, or in aqueous ethanol, for example using the procedure described in Helv. Chim. Acta. (1985) 68:618. Palladium catalyzed hydrogenolysis of phosphonate esters S32.1 in which R¹ is benzyl is described in J. Org. Chem. (1959) 24:434. Platinum-catalyzed hydrogenolysis of phosphonate esters S32.1 in which R¹ is phenyl is described in J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1956) 78:2336.

The conversion of a phosphonate monoester S32.2 into a phosphonate diester

S32.1 (Scheme 32, Reaction 4) in which the newly introduced R¹ group is alkyl, aralkyl, haloalkyl such as chloroethyl, or aralkyl is effected by a number of reactions in which the substrate S32.2 is reacted with a hydroxy compound R¹OH, in the presence of a coupling agent. Typically, the second phosphonate ester group is different than the first introduced phosphonate ester group, i.e. R¹ is followed by the introduction of R² where each of R¹ and R² is alkyl, aralkyl, haloalkyl such as chloroethyl, or aralkyl (Scheme 32, Reaction 4a) whereby S32.2 is converted to S32.1a. Suitable coupling agents are those employed for the preparation of carboxylate esters, and include a carbodiimide such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, in which case the reaction is preferably conducted in a basic organic solvent such as pyridine, or (benzotriazol-1-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PYBOP, Sigma), in which case the reaction is performed in a polar solvent such as dimethylformamide, in the presence of a tertiary organic base such as diisopropylethylamine, or Aldrithiol-2 (Aldrich) in which case the reaction is conducted in a basic solvent such as pyridine, in the presence of a triaryl phosphine such as triphenylphosphine. Alternatively, the conversion of the phosphonate monoester S32.2 to the diester S32.1 is effected by the use of the Mitsunobu reaction, as described above. The substrate is reacted with the hydroxy compound R1OH, in the presence of diethyl azodicarboxylate and a triarylphosphine such as triphenyl phosphine. Alternatively, the phosphonate monoester S32.2 is transformed into the phosphonate diester S32.1, in which the introduced R¹ group is alkenyl or aralkyl, by reaction of the monoester with the halide R¹Br, in which R¹ is as alkenyl or aralkyl. The alkylation reaction is conducted in a polar organic solvent such as dimethylformamide or acetonitrile, in the presence of a base such as cesium carbonate. Alternatively, the phosphonate monoester is transformed into the phosphonate diester in a two step procedure. In the first step, the phosphonate monoester S32.2 is transformed into the chloro analog RP(O)(OR¹)Cl by reaction with thionyl chloride or oxalyl chloride and the like, as described in Organic Phosphorus Compounds, G. M. Kosolapoff, L. Maeir, eds, Wiley, 1976, p. 17, and the thus-obtained product RP(O)(OR¹)Cl is then reacted with the hydroxy compound R¹OH, in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, to afford the phosphonate diester S32.1.

A phosphonic acid R-link-P(O)(OH)₂ is transformed into a phosphonate monoester RP(O)(OR¹)(OH) (Scheme 32, Reaction 5) by means of the methods described above of for the preparation of the phosphonate diester R-link-P(O)(OR¹)₂ S32.1, except that only one molar proportion of the component R¹OH or R¹Br is employed. Dialkyl phosphonates may be prepared according to the methods of: Quast et al (1974) Synthesis 490; Stowell et al (1990) Tetrahedron Lett. 3261; U.S. Pat. No. 5,663,159.

A phosphonic acid R-link-P(O)(OH)₂ S32.3 is transformed into a phosphonate diester R-link-P(O)(OR¹)₂ S32.1 (Scheme 32, Reaction 6) by a coupling reaction with the hydroxy compound R¹OH, in the presence of a coupling agent such as Aldrithiol-2 (Aldrich) and triphenylphosphine. The reaction is conducted in a basic solvent such as pyridine. Alternatively, phosphonic acids S32.3 are transformed into phosphonic esters S32.1 in which R¹ is aryl, by means of a coupling reaction employing, for example, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide in pyridine at ca 70° C. Alternatively, phosphonic acids S32.3 are transformed into phosphonic esters S32.1 in which R¹ is alkenyl, by means of an alkylation reaction. The phosphonic acid is reacted with the alkenyl bromide R¹Br in a polar organic solvent such as acetonitrile solution at reflux temperature, the presence of a base such as cesium carbonate, to afford the phosphonic ester S32.1.

Preparation of Phosphonate Carbamates.

Phosphonate esters may contain a carbamate linkage. The preparation of carbamates is described in Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, A. R. Katritzky, ed., Pergamon, 1995, Vol. 6, p. 416ff, and in Organic Functional Group Preparations, by S. R. Sandler and W. Karo, Academic Press, 1986, p: 260ff. The carbamoyl group may be formed by reaction of a hydroxy group according to the methods known in the art, including the teachings of Ellis, US 2002/0103378 A1 and Hajima, U.S. Pat. No. 6,018,049.

Scheme 33 illustrates various methods by which the carbamate linkage is synthesized. As shown in Scheme 33, in the general reaction generating carbamates, an alcohol S33.1, is converted into the activated derivative S33.2 in which Lv is a leaving group such as halo, imidazolyl, benztriazolyl and the like, as described herein. The activated derivative S33.2 is then reacted with an amine S33.3, to afford the carbamate product S33.4. Examples 1-7 in Scheme 33 depict methods by which the general reaction is effected. Examples 8-10 illustrate alternative methods for the preparation of carbamates.

Scheme 33, Example 1 illustrates the preparation of carbamates employing a chloroformyl derivative of the alcohol S33.5. In this procedure, the alcohol S33.5 is reacted with phosgene, in an inert solvent such as toluene, at about 0° C., as described in Org. Syn. Coll. Vol. 3, 167, 1965, or with an equivalent reagent such as trichloromethoxy chloroformate, as described in Org: Syn. Coll. Vol. 6, 715, 1988, to afford the chloroformate S33.6. The latter compound is then reacted with the amine component S33.3, in the presence of an organic or inorganic base, to afford the carbamate S33.7. For example, the chloroformyl compound S33.6 is reacted with the amine S33.3 in a water-miscible solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, in the presence of aqueous sodium hydroxide, as described in Org. Syn. Coll. Vol. 3, 167, 1965, to yield the carbamate S33.7. Alternatively, the reaction is performed in dichloromethane in the presence of an organic base such as diisopropylethylamine or dimethylaminopyridine.

Scheme 33, Example 2 depicts the reaction of the chloroformate compound S33.6 with imidazole to produce the imidazolide S33.8. The imidazolide product is then reacted with the amine S33.3 to yield the carbamate S33.7. The preparation of the imidazolide is performed in an aprotic solvent such as dichloromethane at 0′, and the preparation of the carbamate is conducted in a similar solvent at ambient temperature, optionally in the presence of a base such as dimethylaminopyridine, as described in J. Med. Chem., 1989, 32, 357.

Scheme 33 Example 3, depicts the reaction of the chloroformate S33.6 with an activated hydroxyl compound R″OH, to yield the mixed carbonate ester S33.10. The reaction is conducted in an inert organic solvent such as ether or dichloromethane, in the presence of a base such as dicyclohexylamine or triethylamine. The hydroxyl component R″OH is selected from the group of compounds S33.19-S33.24 shown in Scheme 33, and similar compounds. For example, if the component R″OH is hydroxybenztriazole S33.19, N-hydroxysuccinimide S33.20, or pentachlorophenol, S33.21, the mixed carbonate S33.10 is obtained by the reaction of the chloroformate with the hydroxyl compound in an ethereal solvent in the presence of dicyclohexylamine, as described in Can. J. Chem., 1982, 60, 976. A similar reaction in which the component R″OH is pentafluorophenol S33.22 or 2-hydroxypyridine S33.23 is performed in an ethereal solvent in the presence of triethylamine, as described in Syn., 1986, 303, and Chem. Ber. 118, 468, 1985.

Scheme 33 Example 4 illustrates the preparation of carbamates in which an alkyloxycarbonylimidazole S33.8 is employed. In this procedure, an alcohol S33.5 is reacted with an equimolar amount of carbonyl diimidazole S33.11 to prepare the intermediate S33.8. The reaction is conducted in an aprotic organic solvent such as dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran. The acyloxyimidazole S33.8 is then reacted with an equimolar amount of the amine R′NH₂ to afford the carbamate S33.7. The reaction is performed in an aprotic organic solvent such as dichloromethane, as described in Tet. Lett., 42, 2001, 5227, to afford the carbamate S33.7.

Scheme 33, Example 5 illustrates the preparation of carbamates by means of an intermediate alkoxycarbonylbenztriazole S33.13. In this procedure, an alcohol ROH is reacted at ambient temperature with an equimolar amount of benztriazole carbonyl chloride S33.12, to afford the alkoxycarbonyl product S33.13. The reaction is performed in an organic solvent such as benzene or toluene, in the presence of a tertiary organic amine such as triethylamine, as described in Synthesis., 1977, 704. The product is then reacted with the amine R′NH₂ to afford the carbamate S33.7. The reaction is conducted in toluene or ethanol, at from ambient temperature to about 80 as described in Synthesis., 1977, 704.

Scheme 33, Example 6 illustrates the preparation of carbamates in which a carbonate (R″O)₂CO, S33.14, is reacted with an alcohol S33.5 to afford the intermediate alkyloxycarbonyl intermediate S33.15. The latter reagent is then reacted with the amine R′NH₂ to afford the carbamate S33.7. The procedure in which the reagent S33.15 is derived from hydroxybenztriazole S33.19 is described in Synthesis, 1993, 908; the procedure in which the reagent S33.15 is derived from N-hydroxysuccinimide S33.20 is described in Tet. Lett., 1992, 2781; the procedure in which the reagent S33.15 is derived from 2-hydroxypyridine S33.23 is described in Tet. Lett., 1991, 4251; the procedure in which the reagent S33.15 is derived from 4-nitrophenol S33.24 is described in Synthesis. 1993, 103. The reaction between equimolar amounts of the alcohol ROH and the carbonate S33.14 is conducted in an inert organic solvent at ambient temperature.

Scheme 33, Example 7 illustrates the preparation of carbamates from alkoxycarbonyl azides S33.16. In this procedure, an alkyl chloroformate S33.6 is reacted with an azide, for example sodium azide, to afford the alkoxycarbonyl azide S33.16. The latter compound is then reacted with an equimolar amount of the amine R′NH₂ to afford the carbamate S33.7. The reaction is conducted at ambient temperature in a polar aprotic solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, for example as described in Synthesis., 1982, 404.

Scheme 33, Example 8 illustrates the preparation of carbamates by means of the reaction between an alcohol ROH and the chloroformyl derivative of an amine S33.17. In this procedure, which is described in Synthetic Organic Chemistry, R. B. Wagner, H. D. Zook, Wiley, 1953, p. 647, the reactants are combined at ambient temperature in an aprotic solvent such as acetonitrile, in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, to afford the carbamate S33.7.

Scheme 33, Example 9 illustrates the preparation of carbamates by means of the reaction between an alcohol ROH and an isocyanate S33.18. In this procedure, which is described in Synthetic Organic Chemistry, R. B. Wagner, H. D. Zook, Wiley, 1953, p. 645, the reactants are combined at ambient temperature in an aprotic solvent such as ether or dichloromethane and the like, to afford the carbamate S33.7.

Scheme 33, Example 10 illustrates the preparation of carbamates by means of the reaction between an alcohol ROH and an amine R′NH₂. In this procedure, which is described in Chem. Lett. 1972, 373, the reactants are combined at ambient temperature in an aprotic organic solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, in the presence of a tertiary base such as triethylamine, and selenium. Carbon monoxide is passed through the solution and the reaction proceeds to afford the carbamate S33.7.

Examples

Preparation of Carboalkoxy-Substituted Phosphonate Bisamidates, Monoamidates, Diesters and Monoesters.

A number of methods are available for the conversion of phosphonic acids into amidates and esters. In one group of methods, the phosphonic acid is either converted into an isolated activated intermediate such as a phosphoryl chloride, or the phosphonic acid is activated in situ for reaction with an amine or a hydroxy compound.

The conversion of phosphonic acids into phosphoryl chlorides is accomplished by reaction with thionyl chloride, for example as described in J. Gen. Chem. USSR, 1983, 53, 480, Zh. Obschei Khim., 1958, 28, 1063, or J. Org. Chem., 1994, 59, 6144, or by reaction with oxalyl chloride, as described in J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1994, 116, 3251, or J. Org. Chem., 1994, 59, 6144, or by reaction with phosphorus pentachloride, as described in J. Org. Chem., 2001, 66, 329, or in J. Med. Chem., 1995, 38, 1372. The resultant phosphoryl chlorides are then reacted with amines or hydroxy compounds in the presence of a base to afford the amidate or ester products.

Phosphonic acids are converted into activated imidazolyl derivatives by reaction with carbonyl diimidazole, as described in J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Comm. (1991) 312, or Nucleosides & Nucleotides (2000) 19:1885. Activated sulfonyloxy derivatives are obtained by the reaction of phosphonic acids with trichloromethylsulfonyl chloride or with triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, as described in Tet. Lett. (1996) 7857, or Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. (1998) 8:663. The activated sulfonyloxy derivatives are then reacted with amines or hydroxy compounds to afford amidates or esters.

Alternatively, the phosphonic acid and the amine or hydroxy reactant are combined in the presence of a diimide coupling agent. The preparation of phosphonic amidates and esters by means of coupling reactions in the presence of dicyclohexyl carbodiimide is described, for example, in J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Comm. (1991) 312 or Coll. Czech. Chem. Comm. (1987) 52:2792. The use of ethyl dimethylaminopropyl carbodiimide for activation and coupling of phosphonic acids is described in Tet. Lett., (2001) 42:8841, or Nucleosides & Nucleotides (2000) 19:1885.

A number of additional coupling reagents have been described for the preparation of amidates and esters from phosphonic acids. The agents include Aldrithiol-2, and PYBOP and BOP, as described in J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 5214, and J. Med. Chem. (1997) 40:3842, mesitylene-2-sulfonyl-3-nitro-1,2,4-triazole (MSNT), as described in J. Med. Chem. (1996) 39:4958, diphenylphosphoryl azide, as described in J. Org. Chem. (1984) 49:1158, 1-(2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl-3-nitro-1,2,4-triazole (TPSNT) as described in Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. (1998) 8:1013, bromotris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BroP), as described in Tet. Lett., (1996) 37:3997, 2-chloro-5,5-dimethyl-2-oxo-1,3,2-dioxaphosphinane, as described in Nucleosides Nucleotides 1995, 14, 871, and diphenyl chlorophosphate, as described in J. Med. Chem., 1988, 31, 1305.

Phosphonic acids are converted into amidates and esters by means of the Mitsunobu reaction, in which the phosphonic acid and the amine or hydroxy reactant are combined in the presence of a triaryl phosphine and a dialkyl azodicarboxylate. The procedure is described in Org. Lett., 2001, 3, 643, or J. Med. Chem., 1997, 40, 3842.

Phosphonic esters are also obtained by the reaction between phosphonic acids and halo compounds, in the presence of a suitable base. The method is described, for example, in Anal. Chem., 1987, 59, 1056, or J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans., I, 1993, 19, 2303, or J. Med. Chem., 1995, 38, 1372, or Tet. Lett., 2002, 43, 1161.

Schemes 34-37 illustrate the conversion of phosphonate esters and phosphonic acids into carboalkoxy-substituted phosphonbisamidates (Scheme 34), phosphonamidates (Scheme 35), phosphonate monoesters (Scheme 36) and phosphonate diesters, (Scheme 37). Scheme 38 illustrates synthesis of gem-dialkyl amino phosphonate reagents.

Scheme 34 illustrates various methods for the conversion of phosphonate diesters S34.1 into phosphonbisamidates S34.5. The diester S34.1, prepared as described previously, is hydrolyzed, either to the monoester S34.2 or to the phosphonic acid S34.6. The methods employed for these transformations are described above. The monoester S34.2 is converted into the monoamidate S34.3 by reaction with an aminoester S34.9, in which the group R² is H or alkyl; the group R^(4b) is a divalent alkylene moiety such as, for example, CHCH₃, CHCH₂CH₃, CH(CH(CH₃)₂), CH(CH₂Ph), and the like, or a side chain group present in natural or modified aminoacids; and the group R^(5b) is C₁-C₁₂ alkyl, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, or isobutyl; C₆-C₂₀ aryl, such as phenyl or substituted phenyl; or C₆-C₂₀ arylalkyl, such as benzyl or benzyhydryl. The reactants are combined in the presence of a coupling agent such as a carbodiimide, for example dicyclohexyl carbodiimide, as described in J. Am. Chem. Soc., (1957) 79:3575, optionally in the presence of an activating agent such as hydroxybenztriazole, to yield the amidate product S34.3. The amidate-forming reaction is also effected in the presence of coupling agents such as BOP, as described in J. Org. Chem. (1995) 60:5214, Aldrithiol, PYBOP and similar coupling agents used for the preparation of amides and esters. Alternatively, the reactants S34.2 and S34.9 are transformed into the monoamidate S34.3 by means of a Mitsunobu reaction. The preparation of amidates by means of the Mitsunobu reaction is described in J. Med. Chem. (1995) 38:2742. Equimolar amounts of the reactants are combined in an inert solvent such as tetrahydrofuran in the presence of a triaryl phosphine and a dialkyl azodicarboxylate. The thus-obtained monoamidate ester S34.3 is then transformed into amidate phosphonic acid S34.4. The conditions used for the hydrolysis reaction depend on the nature of the R¹ group, as described previously. The phosphonic acid amidate S34.4 is then reacted with an aminoester S34.9, as described above, to yield the bisamidate product S34.5, in which the amino substituents are the same or different. Alternatively, the phosphonic acid S34.6 may be treated with two different amino ester reagents simulataneously, i.e. S34.9 where R², R^(4b) or are different. The resulting mixture of bisamidate products S34.5 may then be separable, e.g. by chromatography.

An example of this procedure is shown in Scheme 34, Example 1. In this procedure, a dibenzyl phosphonate S34.14 is reacted with diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) in toluene at reflux, as described in J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 2946, to afford the monobenzyl phosphonate S34.15. The product is then reacted with equimolar amounts of ethyl alaninate S34.16 and dicyclohexyl carbodiimide in pyridine, to yield the amidate product S34.17. The benzyl group is then removed, for example by hydrogenolysis over a palladium catalyst, to give the monoacid product S34.18 which may be unstable according to J. Med. Chem. (1997) 40(23):3842. This compound S34.18 is then reacted in a Mitsunobu reaction with ethyl leucinate S34.19, triphenyl phosphine and diethylazodicarboxylate, as described in J. Med. Chem., 1995, 38, 2742, to produce the bisamidate product S34.20.

Using the above procedures, but employing in place of ethyl leucinate S34.19 or ethyl alaninate S34.16, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

Alternatively, the phosphonic acid S34.6 is converted into the bisamidate S34.5 by use of the coupling reactions described above. The reaction is performed in one step, in which case the nitrogen-related substituents present in the product S34.5 are the same, or in two steps, in which case the nitrogen-related substituents can be different.

An example of the method is shown in Scheme 34, Example 2. In this procedure, a phosphonic acid S34.6 is reacted in pyridine solution with excess ethyl phenylalaninate S34.21 and dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, for example as described in J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Comm., 1991, 1063, to give the bisamidate product S34.22.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl phenylalaninate, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

As a further alternative, the phosphonic acid S34.6 is converted into the mono or bis-activated derivative S34.7, in which Lv is a leaving group such as chloro, imidazolyl, triisopropylbenzenesulfonyloxy etc. The conversion of phosphonic acids into chlorides S34.7 (Lv=Cl) is effected by reaction with thionyl chloride or oxalyl chloride and the like, as described in Organic Phosphorus Compounds, G. M. Kosolapoff, L. Maeir, eds, Wiley, 1976, p. 17. The conversion of phosphonic acids into monoimidazolides S34.7 (Lv imidazolyl) is described in J. Med. Chem., 2002, 45, 1284 and in J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm., 1991, 312. Alternatively, the phosphonic acid is activated by reaction with triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, as described in Nucleosides and Nucleotides, 2000, 10, 1885. The activated product is then reacted with the aminoester S34.9, in the presence of a base, to give the bisamidate S34.5. The reaction is performed in one step, in which case the nitrogen substituents present in the product S34.5 are the same, or in two steps, via the intermediate S34.11, in which case the nitrogen substituents can be different.

Examples of these methods are shown in Scheme 34, Examples 3 and 5. In the procedure illustrated in Scheme 34, Example 3, a phosphonic acid S34.6 is reacted with ten molar equivalents of thionyl chloride, as described in Zh. Obschei Khim., 1958, 28, 1063, to give the dichloro compound S34.23. The product is then reacted at reflux temperature in a polar aprotic solvent such as acetonitrile, and in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, with butyl serinate S34.24 to afford the bisamidate product S34.25.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of butyl serinate S34.24, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

In the procedure illustrated in Scheme 34, Example 5, the phosphonic acid S34.6 is reacted, as described in J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm., 1991, 312, with carbonyl diimidazole to give the imidazolide S34.S32. The product is then reacted in acetonitrile solution at ambient temperature, with one molar equivalent of ethyl alaninate S34.33 to yield the monodisplacement product S34.S34. The latter compound is then reacted with carbonyl diimidazole to produce the activated intermediate S34.35, and the product is then reacted, under the same conditions, with ethyl N-methylalaninate S34.33a to give the bisamidate product S34.36.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl alaninate S34.33 or ethyl N-methylalaninate S34.33a, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

The intermediate monoamidate S34.3 is also prepared from the monoester S34.2 by first converting the monoester into the activated derivative S34.8 in which Lv is a leaving group such as halo, imidazolyl etc, using the procedures described above. The product S34.8 is then reacted with an aminoester S34.9 in the presence of a base such as pyridine, to give an intermediate monoamidate product S34.3. The latter compound is then converted, by removal of the R¹ group and coupling of the product with the aminoester S34.9, as described above, into the bisamidate S34.5.

An example of this procedure, in which the phosphonic acid is activated by conversion to the chloro derivative S34.26, is shown in Scheme 34, Example 4. In this procedure, the phosphonic monobenzyl ester S34.15 is reacted, in dichloromethane, with thionyl chloride, as described in Tetttt. Letters., 1994, 35, 4097, to afford the phosphoryl chloride S34.26. The product is then reacted in acetonitrile solution at ambient temperature with one molar equivalent of ethyl 3-amino-2-methylpropionate S34.27 to yield the monoamidate product S34.28. The latter compound is hydrogenated in ethylacetate over a 5% palladium on carbon catalyst to produce the monoacid product S34.29. The product is subjected to a Mitsunobu coupling procedure, with equimolar amounts of butyl alaninate S34.30, triphenyl phosphine, diethylazodicarboxylate and triethylamine in tetrahydrofuran, to give the bisamidate product S34.31.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl 3-amino-2-methylpropionate S34.27 or butyl alaninate S34.30, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

The activated phosphonic acid derivative S34.7 is also converted into the bisamidate S34.5 via the diamino compound S34.10. The conversion of activated phosphonic acid derivatives such as phosphoryl chlorides into the corresponding amino analogs S34.10, by reaction with ammonia, is described in Organic Phosphorus Compounds, G. M. Kosolapoff, L. Maeir, eds, Wiley, 1976. The bisamino compound S34.10 is then reacted at elevated temperature with a haloester S34.12 (Hal=halogen, i.e. F, Cl, Br, I), in a polar organic solvent such as dimethylformamide, in the presence of a base such as 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP) or potassium carbonate, to yield the bisamidate S34.5. Alternatively, S34.6 may be treated with two different amino ester reagents simulataneously, i.e. S34.12 where R^(4b) or R^(5b) are different. The resulting mixture of bisamidate products S34.5 may then be separable, e.g. by chromatography.

An example of this procedure is shown in Scheme 34, Example 6. In this method, a dichlorophosphonate S34.23 is reacted with ammonia to afford the diamide S34.37. The reaction is performed in aqueous, aqueous alcoholic or alcoholic solution, at reflux temperature. The resulting diamino compound is then reacted with two molar equivalents of ethyl 2-bromo-3-methylbutyrate S34.38, in a polar organic solvent such as N-methylpyrrolidinone at ca. 150° C., in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate, and optionally in the presence of a catalytic amount of potassium iodide, to afford the bisamidate product S34.39.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl 2-bromo-3-methylbutyrate S34.38, different haloesters S34.12 the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained.

The procedures shown in Scheme 34 are also applicable to the preparation of bisamidates in which the aminoester moiety incorporates different functional groups. Scheme 34, Example 7 illustrates the preparation of bisamidates derived from tyrosine. In this procedure, the monoimidazolide S34.32 is reacted with propyl tyrosinate S34.40, as described in Example 5, to yield the monoamidate S34.41. The product is reacted with carbonyl diimidazole to give the imidazolide S34.42, and this material is reacted with a further molar equivalent of propyl tyrosinate to produce the bisamidate product S34.43.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of propyl tyrosinate S34.40, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S34.5 are obtained. The aminoesters employed in the two stages of the above procedure can be the same or different, so that bisamidates with the same or different amino substituents are prepared.

Scheme 35 illustrates methods for the preparation of phosphonate monoamidates.

In one procedure, a phosphonate monoester S34.1 is converted, as described in Scheme 34, into the activated derivative S34.8. This compound is then reacted, as described above, with an aminoester S34.9, in the presence of a base, to afford the monoamidate product S35.1.

The procedure is illustrated in Scheme 35, Example 1. In this method, a monophenyl phosphonate S35.7 is reacted with, for example, thionyl chloride, as described in J. Gen. Chem. USSR., 1983, 32, 367, to give the chloro product S35.8. The product is then reacted, as described in Scheme 34, with ethyl alaninateS3, to yield the amidate S35.10.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl alaninate S35.9, different aminoesters S34.9, the corresponding products S35.1 are obtained.

Alternatively, the phosphonate monoester S34.1 is coupled, as described in Scheme 34, with an aminoester S34.9 to produce the amidateS335.1. If necessary, the R¹ substituent is then altered, by initial cleavage to afford the phosphonic acid S35.2. The procedures for this transformation depend on the nature of the R¹ group, and are described above. The phosphonic acid is then transformed into the ester amidate product S35.3, by reaction with the hydroxy compound R³OH, in which the group R³ is aryl, heterocycle, alkyl, cycloalkyl, haloalkyl etc, using the same coupling procedures (carbodiimide, Aldrithiol-2, PYBOP, Mitsunobu reaction etc) described in Scheme 34 for the coupling of amines and phosphonic acids.

Examples of this method are shown in Scheme 35, Examples 2 and 3. In the sequence shown in Example 2, a monobenzyl phosphonate S35.11 is transformed by reaction with ethyl alaninate, using one of the methods described above, into the monoamidate S35.12. The benzyl group is then removed by catalytic hydrogenation in ethylacetate solution over a 5% palladium on carbon catalyst, to afford the phosphonic acid amidate S35.13. The product is then reacted in dichloromethane solution at ambient temperature with equimolar amounts of 1-(dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide and trifluoroethanol S35.14, for example as described in Tet. Lett., 2001, 42, 8841, to yield the amidate ester S35.15.

In the sequence shown in Scheme 35, Example 3, the monoamidate S35.13 is coupled, in tetrahydrofuran solution at ambient temperature, with equimolar amounts of dicyclohexyl carbodiimide and 4-hydroxy-N-methylpiperidine S35.16, to produce the amidate ester product S35.17.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of the ethyl alaninate product S35.12 different monoacids S35.2, and in place of trifluoroethanol S35.14 or 4-hydroxy-N-methylpiperidine S35.16, different hydroxy compounds R³OH, the corresponding products S35.3 are obtained.

Alternatively, the activated phosphonate ester S34.8 is reacted with ammonia to yield the amidate S35.4. The product is then reacted, as described in Scheme 34, with a haloester S35.5, in the presence of a base, to produce the amidate product S35.6. If appropriate, the nature of the R¹ group is changed, using the procedures described above, to give the product S35.3. The method is illustrated in Scheme 35, Example 4. In this sequence, the monophenyl phosphoryl chloride S35.18 is reacted, as described in Scheme 34, with ammonia, to yield the amino product S35.19. This material is then reacted in N-methylpyrrolidinone solution at 170° with butyl 2-bromo-3-phenylpropionate S35.20 and potassium carbonate, to afford the amidate product S35.21.

Using these procedures, but employing, in place of butyl 2-bromo-3-phenylpropionate S35.20, different haloesters S35.5, the corresponding products S35.6 are obtained.

The monoamidate products S35.3 are also prepared from the doubly activated phosphonate derivatives S34.7. In this procedure, examples of which are described in Synlett., 1998, 1, 73, the intermediate S34.7 is reacted with a limited amount of the aminoester S34.9 to give the mono-displacement product S34.11. The latter compound is then reacted with the hydroxy compound R³OH in a polar organic solvent such as dimethylformamide, in the presence of a base such as diisopropylethylamine, to yield the monoamidate ester S35.3.

The method is illustrated in Scheme 35, Example 5. In this method, the phosphoryl dichloride S35.22 is reacted in dichloromethane solution with one molar equivalent of ethyl N-methyl tyrosinate S35.23 and dimethylaminopyridine, to generate the monoamidate S35.24. The product is then reacted with phenol S35.25 in dimethylformamide containing potassium carbonate, to yield the ester amidate product S35.26.

Using these procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl N-methyl tyrosinate S35.23 or phenol S35.25, the aminoesters 34.9 and/or the hydroxy compounds R³OH, the corresponding products S35.3 are obtained.

Scheme 36 illustrates methods for the preparation of carboalkoxy-substituted phosphonate diesters in which one of the ester groups incorporates a carboalkoxy substituent.

In one procedure, a phosphonate monoester S34.1, prepared as described above, is coupled, using one of the methods described above, with a hydroxyester S36.1, in which the groups R^(4b) and R^(5b) are as described in Scheme 34. For example, equimolar amounts of the reactants are coupled in the presence of a carbodiimide such as dicyclohexyl carbodiimide, as described in Aust. J. Chem., 1963, 609, optionally in the presence of dimethylaminopyridine, as described in Tet., 1999, 55, 12997. The reaction is conducted in an inert solvent at ambient temperature.

The procedure is illustrated in Scheme 36, Example 1. In this method, a monophenyl phosphonate S36.9 is coupled, in dichloromethane solution in the presence of dicyclohexyl carbodiimide, with ethyl 3-hydroxy-2-methylpropionate S36.10 to yield the phosphonate mixed diester S36.11.

Using this procedure, but employing, in place of ethyl 3-hydroxy-2-methylpropionate S36.10, different hydroxyesters S33.1, the corresponding products S33.2 are obtained.

The conversion of a phosphonate monoester S34.1 into a mixed diester S36.2 is also accomplished by means of a Mitsunobu coupling reaction with the hydroxyester S36.1, as described in Org. Lett., 2001, 643. In this method, the reactants 34.1 and S36.1 are combined in a polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, in the presence of a triarylphosphine and a dialkyl azodicarboxylate, to give the mixed diester S36.2. The R¹ substituent is varied by cleavage, using the methods described previously, to afford the monoacid product S36.3. The product is then coupled, for example using methods described above, with the hydroxy compound R³OH, to give the diester product S36.4.

The procedure is illustrated in Scheme 36, Example 2. In this method, a monoallyl phosphonate S36.12 is coupled in tetrahydrofuran solution, in the presence of triphenylphosphine and diethylazodicarboxylate, with ethyl lactate S36.13 to give the mixed diester S36.14. The product is reacted with tris(triphenylphosphine) rhodium chloride (Wilkinson catalyst) in acetonitrile, as described previously, to remove the allyl group and produce the monoacid product S36.15. The latter compound is then coupled, in pyridine solution at ambient temperature, in the presence of dicyclohexyl carbodiimide, with one molar equivalent of 3-hydroxypyridine S36.16 to yield the mixed diester S36.17.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of the ethyl lactate S36.13 or 3-hydroxypyridine, a different hydroxyester S36.1 and/or a different hydroxy compound R³OH, the corresponding products S36.4 are obtained.

The mixed diesters S36.2 are also obtained from the monoesters S34.1 via the intermediacy of the activated monoesters S36.5. In this procedure, the monoester S34.1 is converted into the activated compound S36.5 by reaction with, for example, phosphorus pentachloride, as described in J. Org. Chem., 2001, 66, 329, or with thionyl chloride or oxalyl chloride (Lv=Cl), or with triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl chloride in pyridine, as described in Nucleosides and Nucleotides, 2000, 19, 1885, or with carbonyl diimidazole, as described in J. Med. Chem., 2002, 45, 1284. The resultant activated monoester is then reacted with the hydroxyester S36.1, as described above, to yield the mixed diester S36.2.

The procedure is illustrated in Scheme 36, Example 3. In this sequence, a monophenyl phosphonate S36.9 is reacted, in acetonitrile solution at 70° C., with ten equivalents of thionyl chloride, so as to produce the phosphoryl chloride S36.19. The product is then reacted with ethyl 4-carbamoyl-2-hydroxybutyrate S36.20 in dichloromethane containing triethylamine, to give the mixed diester S36.21.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl 4-carbamoyl-2-hydroxybutyrate S36.20, different hydroxyesters S36.1, the corresponding products S36.2 are obtained.

The mixed phosphonate diesters are also obtained by an alternative route for incorporation of the R³O group into intermediates S36.3 in which the hydroxyester moiety is already incorporated. In this procedure, the monoacid intermediate S36.3 is converted into the activated derivative S36.6 in which Lv is a leaving group such as chloro, imidazole, and the like, as previously described. The activated intermediate is then reacted with the hydroxy compound R³OH, in the presence of a base, to yield the mixed diester product S36.4.

The method is illustrated in Scheme 36, Example 4. In this sequence, the phosphonate monoacid S36.22 is reacted with trichloromethanesulfonyl chloride in tetrahydrofuran containing collidine, as described in J. Med. Chem., 1995, 38, 4648, to produce the trichloromethanesulfonyloxy product S36.23. This compound is reacted with 3-(morpholinomethyl)phenol S36.24 in dichloromethane containing triethylamine, to yield the mixed diester product S36.25.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of with 3-(morpholinomethyl)phenol S36.24, different alcohols R³OH, the corresponding products S36.4 are obtained.

The phosphonate esters S36.4 are also obtained by means of alkylation reactions performed on the monoesters S34.1. The reaction between the monoacid S34.1 and the haloester S36.7 is performed in a polar solvent in the presence of a base such as diisopropylethylamine, as described in Anal. Chem., 1987, 59, 1056, or triethylamine, as described in J. Med. Chem., 1995, 38, 1372, or in a non-polar solvent such as benzene, in the presence of 18-crown-6, as described in Syn. Comm., 1995, 25, 3565.

The method is illustrated in Scheme 36, Example 5. In this procedure, the monoacid S36.26 is reacted with ethyl 2-bromo-3-phenylpropionate S36.27 and diisopropylethylamine in dimethylfommamide at 80° C. to afford the mixed diester product S36.28.

Using the above procedure, but employing, in place of ethyl 2-bromo-3-phenylpropionate S36.27, different haloesters S36.7, the corresponding products S36.4 are obtained.

Scheme 37 illustrates methods for the preparation of phosphonate diesters in which both the ester substituents incorporate carboalkoxy groups.

The compounds are prepared directly or indirectly from the phosphonic acids S34.6. In one alternative, the phosphonic acid is coupled with the hydroxyester S37.2, using the conditions described previously in Schemes 34-36, such as coupling reactions using dicyclohexyl carbodiimide or similar reagents, or under the conditions of the Mitsunobu reaction, to afford the diester product S37.3 in which the ester substituents are identical.

This method is illustrated in Scheme 37, Example 1. In this procedure, the phosphonic acid S34.6 is reacted with three molar equivalents of butyl lactate S37.5 in the presence of Aldrithiol-2 and triphenyl phosphine in pyridine at ca. 70° C., to afford the diester S37.6.

Using the above procedure, but employing, in place of butyl lactate S37.5, different hydroxyesters S37.2, the corresponding products S37.3 are obtained.

Alternatively, the diesters S37.3 are obtained by alkylation of the phosphonic acid S34.6 with a haloester S37.1. The alkylation reaction is performed as described in Scheme 36 for the preparation of the esters S36.4.

This method is illustrated in Scheme 37, Example 2. In this procedure, the phosphonic acid S34.6 is reacted with excess ethyl 3-bromo-2-methylpropionate S37.7 and diisopropylethylamine in dimethylformamide at ca. 80° C., as described in Anal. Chem., 1987, 59, 1056, to produce the diester S37.8.

Using the above procedure, but employing, in place of ethyl 3-bromo-2-methylpropionate S37.7, different haloesters S37.1, the corresponding products S37.3 are obtained.

The diesters S37.3 are also obtained by displacement reactions of activated derivatives S34.7 of the phosphonic acid with the hydroxyesters S37.2. The displacement reaction is performed in a polar solvent in the presence of a suitable base, as described in Scheme 36. The displacement reaction is performed in the presence of an excess of the hydroxyester, to afford the diester product S37.3 in which the ester substituents are identical, or sequentially with limited amounts of different hydroxyesters, to prepare diesters S37.3 in which the ester substituents are different.

The methods are illustrated in Scheme 37, Examples 3 and 4. As shown in Example 3, the phosphoryl dichloride S35.22 is reacted with three molar equivalents of ethyl 3-hydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)propionate S37.9 in tetrahydrofuran containing potassium carbonate, to obtain the diester product S37.10.

Using the above procedure, but employing, in place of ethyl 3-hydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)propionate S37.9, different hydroxyesters S37.2, the corresponding products S37.3 are obtained.

Scheme 37, Example 4 depicts the displacement reaction between equimolar amounts of the phosphoryl dichloride S35.22 and ethyl 2-methyl-3-hydroxypropionate S37.11, to yield the monoester product S37.12. The reaction is conducted in acetonitrile at 70° in the presence of diisopropylethylamine. The product S37.12 is then reacted, under the same conditions, with one molar equivalent of ethyl lactate S37.13, to give the diester product S37.14.

Using the above procedures, but employing, in place of ethyl 2-methyl-3-hydroxypropionate S37.11 and ethyl lactate S37.13, sequential reactions with different hydroxyesters S37.2, the corresponding products S37.3 are obtained.

2,2-Dimethyl-2-aminoethylphosphonic acid intermediates can be prepared by the route in Scheme 5. Condensation of 2-methyl-2-propanesulfinamide with acetone give sulfinyl imine S38.11 (J. Org. Chem. 1999, 64, 12). Addition of dimethyl methylphosphonate lithium to S38.11 afford S38.12. Acidic methanolysis of S38.12 provide amine S38.13. Protection of amine with Cbz group and removal of methyl groups yield phosphonic acid S38.14, which can be converted to desired S38.15 (Scheme 38a) using methods reported earlier on. An alternative synthesis of compound S38.14 is also shown in Scheme 38b. Commercially available 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol is converted to aziridines S38.16 according to literature methods (J. Org. Chem. 1992, 57, 5813; Syn. Lett. 1997, 8, 893). Aziridine opening with phosphite give S38.17 (Tetrahedron Lett. 1980, 21, 1623). Reprotection) of S38.17 affords S38.14.

ENUMERATED EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

1. A compound, including enantiomers thereof, of Formula 1A, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof,

wherein:

A⁰ is A¹, A², or A³; A¹ is

A² is

A³ is:

Y¹ is independently O, S, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), or N(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

Y² is independently a bond, Y³, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —S(O)_(M2)—, or —S(O)_(M2)—S(O)_(M2)—;

Y³ is O, S(O)_(M2), S, or C(R²)₂;

R^(x) is independently H, R¹, R², W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein:

R^(y) is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group;

R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms;

R² and R^(2a) are independently H, R¹, R³, or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or, when taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

R³ is R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), or R^(3e), provided that when R³ is bound to a heteroatom, then R³ is R^(3c) or R^(3d);

R^(3a) is R^(3e), —CN, N₃ or —NO₂;

R^(3b) is (═Y¹);

R^(3c) is -R^(x), —N(R^(x))(R^(x)), —SR^(x), —S(O)R^(x), —S(O)₂R^(x), —S(O)(OR^(x)), —S(O)₂(OR^(x)), —OC(Y¹)R^(x), —OC(Y¹)OR^(x), —OC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —SC(Y¹)R^(x), —SC(Y¹)OR^(x), —SC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), N(R^(x))C(Y¹)R^(x), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)OR^(x), or —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R^(3d) is —C(Y¹)R^(x), —C(Y¹)OR^(x) or —C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R^(3c) is F, Cl, Br or I;

R⁴ is an alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms;

R⁵ is H or R⁴, wherein each R⁴ is substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

W³ is W⁴ or W⁵;

W⁴ is R⁵, —C(Y¹)R⁵, —C(Y¹)W⁵, —SO_(M2)R⁵, or —SO_(M2)W⁵;

W⁵ is carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W⁵ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups;

W⁶ is W³ independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 A³ groups;

M2 is 0, 1 or 2;

M12a is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M12b is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M1a, M1c, and M1d are independently 0 or 1; and

M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

provided that the compound of Formula 1A is not of the structure 556-E.6

or its ethyl diester.

2. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl 3. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl. 4. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein R² is selected from selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl. 5. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1B

6. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1C

7. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1D

8. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1E

9. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1F

10. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1G

11. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1H

12. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1I

wherein:

Y⁴ is N or C(R³).

13. The compound of embodiment 1 that has the formula 1J

14. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein R^(2a) is halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl. 15. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein R^(x) is a naturally occurring amino acid. 16. A compound, enantiomers thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof that is of the general structure of formula I

wherein

B is Base;

Z is O, S, or C(R^(k))₂;

R^(3e) is F, Cl, Br or I;

A^(6k) —CH₂P(Y^(k))(A^(5k))(Y^(k2)A^(5k)), —CH₂P(Y^(k))(A^(5k))(A^(5k)), or —CH₂P(Y^(k))(Y^(kA)A^(5k))(Y^(k2)A^(5k)), optionally substituted with R^(k);

A^(5k) is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with R^(k);

Y^(k) is O or S;

Y^(k2) is O, N(R^(k)), or S; and

each R² and R^(2a) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; and

each R^(k) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; provided that the compound of Formula 1A is not of the structure 556-E.6

or its ethyl diester.

17. The compound of embodiment 16 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl 18. The compound of embodiment 16 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl. 19. The compound of embodiment 1 selected from:

a) Formula 1A wherein A⁰ is A³;

b) Formula 1A wherein A⁰ is

c) Formula 1A wherein:

-   -   A⁰ is

-   -   and     -   each R² and R^(2a) is H;

d) Formula 1A wherein:

-   -   A³ is

-   -   R³ is —N(R^(x))(R^(x));     -   each R² and R^(2a) is H.

e) Formula 1A wherein:

-   -   A⁰ is

-   -   and each R² and R^(2a) is H.         20. The compound of embodiment 1, wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein:

Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and

M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

21. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

22. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups. 23. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups. 24. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

25. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein:

Y^(1a) is O or S;

Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and

Y^(2c) is O, N(R) or S; and

each R² and R^(2a) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl.

26. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein each R is independently H or alkyl. 27. The compound of embodiment 1 which is isolated and purified. 28. A compound of formula MBF I, or prodrugs, solvates, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or esters thereof

wherein

each K1 and K2 are independently selected from the group consisting of A^(5k) and —Y^(k2)A^(5k);

Y^(k2) is O, N(R^(k)), or S;

B is Base;

A^(5k) is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with R^(k); and

R^(k) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; provided that when B is adenine, then both K1 and K2 are not simultaneously both —OH or —OEt.

29. The compound of embodiment 28 wherein B is selected form the group consisting of 2,6-diaminopurine, guanine, adenine, cytosine, 5-fluoro-cytosine, monodeaza, and monoaza analogues thereof. 30. The compound of embodiment 28 wherein MBF I is of the formula

31. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein B is selected from the group consisting of adenine, guanine, cytosine, uracil, thymine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaadenine, inosine, nebularine, nitropyrrole, nitroindole, 2-aminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, hypoxanthine, pseudouridine, pseudocytosine, pseudoisocytosine, 5-propynylcytosine, isocytosine, isoguanine, 7-deazaguanine, 2-thiopyrimidine, 6-thioguanine, 4-thiothymine, 4-thiouracil, O⁶-methylguanine, N⁶-methyladenine, O⁴-methylthymine, 5,6-dihydrothymine, 5,6-dihydrouracil, 4-methylindole, substituted triazole, and pyrazolo[3,4-D]pyrimidine. 32. The compound of embodiment 1 wherein B is selected form the group consisting of adenine, guanine, cytosine, uracil, thymine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaadenine, aminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, and 7-deazaguanine. 33. The compound of embodiment 1 that is selected from Table Y. 34 The compound of embodiment 28 wherein K1 and K2 are selected from Table 100.

TABLE 100 K1 K2 Ester Ala OPh cPent Ala OCH₂CF₃ Et Ala OPh 3-furan-4H Ala OPh cBut Phe(B) OPh Et Phe(A) OPh Et Ala(B) OPh Et Phe OPh sBu(S) Phe OPh cBu Phe OCH₂CF₃ iBu Ala(A) OPh Et Phe OPh sBu(R) Ala(B) OPh CH₂cPr Ala(A) OPh CH₂cPr Phe(B) OPh nBu Phe(A) OPh nBu Phe OPh CH₂cPr Phe OPh CH₂cBu Ala OPh 3-pent ABA(B) OPh Et ABA(A) OPh Et Ala OPh CH₂cBu Met OPh Et Pro OPh Bn Phe(B) OPh iBu Phe(A) OPh iBu Phe OPh iPr Phe OPh nPr Ala OPh CH₂cPr Phe OPh Et Ala OPh Et ABA OPh nPent Phe Phe nPr Phe Phe Et Ala Ala Et CHA OPh Me Gly OPh iPr ABA OPh nBu Phe OPh allyl Ala OPh nPent Gly OPh iBu ABA OPh iBu Ala OPh nBu CHA CHA Me Phe Phe Allyl ABA ABA nPent Gly Gly iBu Gly Gly iPr Phe OPh iBu Ala OPh nPr Phe OPh nBu ABA OPh nPr ABA OPh Et Ala Ala Bn Phe Phe nBu ABA ABA nPr ABA ABA Et Ala Ala nPr Ala OPh iPr Ala OPh Bn Ala Ala nBu Ala Ala iBu ABA ABA nBu ABA ABA iPr Ala OPh iBu ABA OPh Me ABA OPh iPr ABA ABA iBu

-   -   wherein Ala represents L-alanine, Phe represents         L-phenylalanine, Met represents L-methionine, ABA represents         (S)-2-aminobutyric acid, Pro represents L-proline, CHA         represents 2-amino-3-(S)cyclohexylpropionic acid, Gly represents         glycine;     -   K1 or K2 amino acid carboxyl groups are esterified as denoted in         the ester column, wherein     -   cPent is cyclopentane ester; Et is ethyl ester, 3-furan-4H is         the (R) tetrahydrofuran-3-yl ester; cBut is cyclobutane ester;         sBu(S) is the (S) secButyl ester; sBu(R) is the (R) secButyl         ester; iBu is isobutyl ester; CH₂cPr is methylcyclopropane         ester, nBu is n-butyl ester; CH₂cBu is methylcyclobutane ester;         3-pent is 3-pentyl ester; nPent is nPentyl ester; iPr is         isopropyl ester, nPr is nPropyl ester; allyl is allyl ester; Me         is methyl ester; Bn is Benzyl ester; and     -   wherein A or B in parentheses denotes one stereoisomer at         phosphorus, with the least polar isomer denoted as (A) and the         more polar as (B).         35. A compound of formula B, and the salts and solvates thereof.

wherein:

A³ is:

Y¹ is independently O, S, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), or N(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

Y² is independently a bond, O, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —S(O)_(M2)—, or —S(O)_(M2)—S(O)_(M2)—; and when Y² joins two phosphorous atoms Y² can also be C(R²)(R²);

R^(x) is independently H, R¹, R², W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein:

R¹ is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group;

R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms;

R² and R^(2a) are independently H, R¹, R³, or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 carbons and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

R³ is R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c) or R^(3d), provided that when R³ is bound to a heteroatom, then R³ is R^(3c) or R^(3d);

R^(3a) is F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, N₃ or —NO₂;

R^(3b) is Y¹;

R^(3c) is -R^(x), —N(R^(x))(R^(x)), —SR^(x), —S(O)R^(x), —S(O)₂R^(x), —S(O)(OR^(x)), —S(O)₂(OR^(x)), —OC(Y¹)R^(x), —OC(Y¹)OR^(x), —OC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —SC(Y¹)R^(x), —SC(Y¹)OR^(x), —SC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)R^(x), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)OR^(x), or —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R^(3d) is —C(Y¹)R^(x), —C(Y¹)OR^(x) or —C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x)));

R⁴ is an alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms;

R⁵ is R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups;

W³ is W⁴ or W⁵;

W⁴ is R⁵, —C(Y¹)R⁵, —C(Y¹)W⁵, —SO_(M2)R⁵, or —SO_(M2)W⁵;

W⁵ is carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W⁵ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups;

W⁶ is W³ independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 A³ groups;

M2 is 0, 1 or 2;

M12a is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M12b is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;

M1a, M1c, and M1d are independently 0 or 1; and

M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; wherein A³ is not —O—CH₂—P(O)(OH)₂ or —O—CH₂—P(O)(OEt)₂.

36. The compound of embodiment 35 wherein m2 is 0, Y¹ is O, Y² is O, M12b and M12a are 1, one Y³ is —OR^(x) where R^(x) is W³ and the other Y³ is N(H)R^(x) where R^(x) is

37. The compound of embodiment 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is selected from the group of esters in Table 100. 38. The compound of embodiment 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is a C₁-C₈ normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic alkylene, alkynylene or alkenylene. 39. The compound of embodiment 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is a heterocycle containing 5 to 6 ring atoms and 1 or 2 N, O and/or S atoms in the ring. 40. The compound of embodiment 1 having the formula XX:

41. The compound of embodiment 1 having the formula XXX:

42. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutical excipient and an antivirally-effective amount of the compound of embodiment 1. 43. The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment 32 that further comprises a second active ingredient. 44. A combination comprising the compound of embodiment 1 and one or more antivirally active ingredients. 45. The combination of embodiment 44 wherein one or more of the active ingredients is selected from Table 98. 46. The combination of embodiment 45 wherein one of the active ingredients is selected from the group consisting of Truvada, Viread, Emtriva, d4T, Sustiva, or Amprenavir antiviral compounds. 47. The combination of embodiment 44 wherein one or more of the active ingredients is selected from Table 99. 48. The combination of embodiment 47 wherein one of the active ingredients is selected from the group consisting of Truvada, Viread, Emtriva, d4T, Sustiva, or Amprenavir antiviral compounds. 49. The combination of embodiment 46 for use in medical therapy. 50. The combination of embodiment 48 for use in medical therapy. 51. The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment 42 for use in medical therapy, 52. The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment 43 for use in medical therapy 53. The compound of embodiment 1 for use in antiretroviral or antihepadinaviral treatment. 54. A method of preparing the compound of embodiment 1 according to the Examples or Schemes. 55. Use of a compound of embodiment 1 for preparing a medicament for treating HIV or a HIV associated disorder. 56. A method of therapy for treating HIV or HIV-associated disorders with the compound of embodiment 1. 57. A method of treating disorders associated with HIV, said method comprising administering to an individual infected with, or at risk for HIV infection, a pharmaceutical composition which comprises a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of any of embodiments 1-28. 58. A compound of Table Y, provided the compound is not

or its ethyl diester.

EXAMPLES AND EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Examples

2-deoxy-2-fluoro-3,5-di-O-benzoyl-•-D-arabinofuranosylbromide (2) Tann et al., JOC 1985, 50, p 3644

Howell et al. JOC 1988, 53, p 85.

To a solution of 1 (120 g, 258 mmol), commercially available from Davos or CMS chemicals, in CH₂Cl₂ (1 L) was added 33% HBr/Acetic acid (80 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, cooled with ice-water, and slowly neutralized over 1-2 h with NaHCO₃ (150 g/1.5 L solution). The CH₂Cl₂ phase was separated and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with NaHCO₃ until no acid was present. The organic phase was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give product 2 as a yellow oil (˜115 g).

2-deoxy-2-fluoro-3,5-di-O-benzoyl-β-D-arabinofuranosyl-9H-6-chloropurine (3)

Ma et al., J. Med. Chem. 1997, 40, 2750 Marquez et al., J. Med. Chem. 1990, 33, 978 Hildebrand et al., J. Org. Chem. 1992, 57, 1808 Kazimierczuk et al. JACS 1984, 106, 6379

To a suspension of NaH (14 g, 60%) in ACETONITRILE (900 mL), 6-chloropurine (52.6 g) was added in 3 portions. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. A solution of 2 (258 mmol) in ACETONITRILE (300 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction was quenched with Acetic acid (3.5 mL), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between CH₂Cl₂ and water. The organic phase was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue was treated with CH₂Cl₂ and then EtOH (˜1:2 overall) to precipitate out the desired product 3 as a yellowish solid (83 g, 65% from 1).

2-deoxy-2-fluoro-β-D-arabinofuranosyl-6-methoxyadenine (4)

To a suspension of 3 (83 g, 167 mmol) in Methanol (1 L) at 0° C., NaOMe (25% wt, 76 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, and then quenched with Acetic acid (˜11 mL, pH=7). The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the resultant residue partitioned between hexane and water (approximately 500 mL hexane and 300 mL water). The aqueous layer was separated and the organic layer mixed with water once again (approximately 300 mL). The water fractions were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure to ˜100 mL. The product, 4, precipitated out and was collected by filtration (42 g, 88%).

2-deoxy-2-fluoro-5-carboxy-β-D-arabinofuranosyl-6-methoxyadenine (5)

Moss et al. J. Chem. Soc 1963, p 1149

A mixture of Pt/C (10%, 15 g (20-30% mol equiv.) as a water slurry) and NaHCO₃ (1.5 g, 17.94 mmol) in H₂O (500 mL) was stirred at 65° C. under H₂ for 0.5 h. The reaction mixture was then allowed to cool, placed under a vacuum and flushed with N₂ several times to completely remove all H₂. Compound 4 (5.1 g, 17.94 mmol) was then added at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 65° C. under O₂ (balloon) until the reaction was complete by LC-MS (typically 24-72 h). The mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered. The Pt/C was washed with H₂O extensively. The combined filtrates were concentrated to ˜30 mL, and acidified (pH 4) by the addition of HCl (4N) at 0° C. A black solid precipitated out which was collected by filtration. The crude product was dissolved in a minimum amount of Methanol and filtered through a pad of silica gel (eluting with Methanol). The filtrate was concentrated and crystallized from water to give compound 5 (2.5 g) as an off-white solid.

(2′R,3′S,4′R,5′R)-6-Methoxy-9-[tetrahydro 4-iodo-3-fluoro-5-(diethoxyphosphinyl)methoxy-2-furanyl purine (6)

Zemlicka et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 1972, 94, p 3213

To a solution of 5 (22 g, 73.77 mmol) in DMF (400 mL), DMF dineopentyl acetal (150 mL, 538 mmol) and methanesulfonic acid (9.5 mL, 146.6 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80-93° C. (internal temperature) for 30 min, then cooled to room temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic phase was separated and washed with NaHCO₃ followed by brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue and diethyl (hydroxymethyl)phosphonate (33 mL, 225 mmol) were dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (250 mL) and cooled down to −40° C. A solution of iodine monobromide (30.5 g, 1.1 mol) in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at −20 to −5° C. for 6 h. The reaction was then quenched with NaHCO₃ and Na₂S₂O₃. The organic phase was separated and the water phase was extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography to give product 6 (6 g, 15.3%).

Alternative Procedure for the Preparation of 6

A solution of 5 (2.0 g, 6.7 mmol) in THF (45 mL) was treated with triphenyl phosphine (2.3 g, 8.7 mmol) under N₂. Diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (1.8 g, 8.7 mmol) was added slowly. The resultant mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and then concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness. The residue was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (20 ml), and then treated with diethyl(hydroxymethyl)phosphonate (4.5 g, 27 mmol). The mixture was cooled to −60° C. and then a cold solution of iodine monobromide 2 g, 9.6 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was warmed to −10° C. and then kept at −10° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH₂Cl₂, washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO₃, and then with aqueous sodium thiosulfate. The organic phase was separated, dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness. The reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography (eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in CH₂Cl₂, then switching to 3% methanol in CH₂Cl₂) to afford product 6 (0.9 g, 33%).

(2′R,5′R)-6-Methoxy-9-[3-fluoro-2,5-dihydro-5-(diethoxyphosphinyl)methoxy-2-furanyl]purine (7)

To a solution of compound 6 (6 g, 11.3 mmol) in acetic acid (2.5 mL) and methanol (50 mL), NaClO (10-13%) (50 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was then stirred for 0.5 h and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was treated with ethyl acetate and then filtered to remove solids. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography to give product 7 (4 g, 88%).

(2′R,5′R)-9-(3-fluoro-2,5-dihydro-5-phosphonomethoxy-2-furanyl)adenine Disodium Salt (8)

A solution of compound 7 (2.3 g, 5.7 mmol) in methanol (6 mL) was mixed with ammonium hydroxide (28-30%) (60 mL). The resultant mixture was stirred at 120° C. for 4 h, cooled, and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under vacuum for 12 h. The residue was dissolved in DMF (40 mL) and bromotrimethylsilane (3.5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in aqueous NaHCO₃ (2.3 g in 100 mL of water). The solution was evaporated and the residue was purified on C-18 (40 μm) column, eluting with water. The aqueous fractions were freeze dried to give di-sodium salt 8 (1.22 g, 57%).

Example of Monoamidate Preparation (9)

Disodium salt 8 (25 mg, 0.066 mmol), (S)-Ala-O-cyclobutyl ester hydrochloride (24 mg, 2 eq., 0.133 mmol) and phenol (31 mg, 0.333 mmol) were mixed in anhydrous pyridine (1 mL). Triethylamine (111 μL, 0.799 mmol) was added and the resultant mixture was stirred at 60° C. under nitrogen. In a separate flask, 2′-Aldrithiol (122 mg, 0.466 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (103 mg, 0.466 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (0.5 mL) and the resulting yellow solution was stirred for 15-20 min. The solution was then added to the solution of 8 in one portion. The combined mixture was stirred at 60° C. under nitrogen for 16 h to give a clear yellow to light brown solution. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resultant oil was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ and purified by silica gel chromatography (eluting with a linear gradient of 0 to 5% MeOH in CH₂Cl₂) to give an oil. The resulting oil was dissolved in acetonitrile and water and purified by preparative HPLC (linear gradient, 5-95% acetonitrile in water). Pure fractions were combined and freeze-dried to give mono amidate 9 as a white powder.

Example of Bis Amidate Preparation (10)

Disodium salt 8 (12 mg, 0.032 mmol) and (S)-Ala-O-n-Pr ester hydrochloride (32 mg, 6 eq., 0.192 mmol) were mixed in anhydrous pyridine (1 mL). Triethylamine (53 μL, 0.384 mmol) was added and the resultant mixture was stirred at 60° C. under nitrogen. In a separate flask, 2′-Aldrithiol (59 mg, 0.224 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (49 mg, 0.224 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (0.5 mL) and the resulting yellow solution was stirred for 15-20 min. The solution was then added to the solution of 8 in one portion. The combined mixture was stirred at 60° C. under nitrogen for 16 h to give a clear yellow to light brown solution. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resultant oil was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ and purified by silica gel chromatography (eluting with a linear gradient of 0 to 5% MeOH in CH₂Cl₂) to give an oil. The resulting oil was dissolved in acetonitrile and water and purified by preparative HPLC (linear gradient, 5-95% acetonitrile in water). Pure fractions were combined and freeze-dried to give bis amidate as a white powder.

Example of Monoamidate Preparation (11)

Compound 8 (1.5 g, 4 mmol) was mixed with ethyl alanine ester HCl salt (1.23 g, 8 mmol) and phenol (1.88 g, 20 mmol). Anhydrous pyridine (35 mL) was added followed by TEA (6.7 mL, 48 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 60° C. under nitrogen for 15-20 min. 2′-Aldrithiol (7.3 g) was mixed in a separate flask with triphenylphosphine (6.2 g) in anhydrous pyridine (5 mL) and the resultant mixture was stirred for 10-15 min to give a clear light yellow solution. The solution was then added to the above mixture and stirred overnight at 60° C. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to remove pyridine. The resultant residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (2×) and then with saturated sodium chloride solution. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resultant oil was dissolved in dichloromethane and loaded onto a dry CombiFlash column, 40 g, eluting, with a linear gradient of 0-5% methanol in dichloromethane over 10 min and then 5% methanol in dichloromethane for 7-10 min. Fractions containing the desired product were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a foam. The foam was dissolved in acetonitrile and purified by prep HPLC to give 11 (0.95 g). Dissolved 11 (950 mg) in small amount of acetonitrile and let stand at room temperature overnight. Collected solid by filtration and washed with small amount of acetonitrile. Solid was GS-327625. Filtrate was reduced under vacuum and then loaded onto Chiralpak AS-H column equilibrated in Buffer A, 2% ethanol in acetonitrile. Isomer A, 12, was eluted out with Buffer A at 10 mL/min for 17 mins. After which Buffer 13, 50% methanol in acetonitrile, was used to elute isomer 13 out from the column in 8 mins. Removed all solvent and then re-dissolved in acetonitrile and water. Freeze-dried the samples (Mass—348 mg).

Example 11b

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (s, 1H) • 8.12 (s, 1H) • 6.82 (m, 1H) • 5.96-5.81 (m, 4H) • 4.03-3.79 (m, 10H) • 3.49 (s, 1H) • 3.2 (m, 2H) • 1.96-1.69 (m, 10H) • 1.26 (m, 4H) • 0.91 (m, 12H) • 31P NMR (CDCl3) 20.37 (s, 1P) MS (M+1) 614

Example 12b

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (s, 1H) • 8.13 (s, 1H) • 7.27-7.11 (m, 5H) • 6.82 (s, 1H) • 5.97-5.77 (m, 4H) • 4.14-3.79 (m, 6H) • 3.64 (t, 1H) • 2.00-1.88 (bm, 4H) • 1.31 (dd, 3H) • 0.91 (m, 6H). ³¹P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.12 (s, 0.5P) • 19.76 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 535

Example 13b

¹H NMR (CDCl₃): • 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.95 (m, 1H), 5.81 (s, 1H), 4.98 (m, 2H), 3.90 (m, 2H), 3.37 (m, 1H), 3.19 (m, 1H), 1.71 (m, 4H), 1.25 (m, 12H), 0.90 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 586.3

Example 14

¹H NMR (CDCl₃): • 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 6.80 (m 1H), 5.93 (m, 1H), 5.79 (s, 1H), 4.02 (m, 6H), 3.42 (m, 1H), 3.21 (m, 1H), 1.65 (m, 4H), 1.35 (m, 8H), 0.92 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 614.3

Example 15

¹H NMR (CDCl₃): • 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 6.80 (m 1H), 5.93 (m, 2H), 5.80 (s, 1H), 3.91 (m, 6H), 3.42 (m, 1H), 3.30 (m, 1H), 1.91 (m, 2H), 1.40 (m, 6H), 0.90 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 586.3

Example 16

¹H NMR (CDCl₃): • 8.37 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 6.80 (m 1H), 6.18 (s, 1H), 5.93 (m, 1H), 5.79 (s, 1H), 4.02 (m, 6H), 3.46 (m, 1H), 3.37 (m, 1H), 1.61 (m, 4H), 1.32 (m, 10H), 0.92 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 614.3

Example 17

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 6.00 (s, 1H), 5.96 (m, 1H), 4.04 (m, 8H), 1.66 (m, 4H), 1.38 (m, 6H), 0.98 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 558.3

Example 18

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 5.99 (s, 1H), 5.96 (m, 1H), 4.04 (m, 8H), 1.67 (m, 4H), 1.23 (m, 6H), 0.95 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 558.3

Example 19

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 5.99 (s, 1H), 5.96 (m, 1H), 4.03 (m, 8H), 1.66 (m, 8H), 0.93 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 586.3

Example 20

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.21 (m, 10H), 6.80 (m 1H), 5.91 (s, 1H), 5.72 (m, 1H), 4.04 (m, 6H), 3.50 (m, 2H), 2.90 (m, 4H), 1.47 (m, 8H), 0.92 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 738.4

Example 21

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.24 (s, 2H), 7.33 (m, 10H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.88 (s, 1H), 5.84 (m, 1H), 5.12 (m, 4H), 3.94 (m, 4H), 1.35 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 654.3

Example 22

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.38 (d, 1H) • 8.12 (d, 1H) • 7.31-7.10 (m, 5H) • 6.81 (m, 1H) • 5.98-5.75 (m, 4H) • 4.23-3.92 (M, 7H) • 3.65 (m, 1H) • 1.63 (m, 3H) • 1.26 (m, 4H) • 1.05-0.78 (m, 3H) 31P NMR • 21.01 (s, 0.6P) • 20.12 (s, 0.4P) MS (M+1) 521

Example 23

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.40 (d, 1H) • 8.13 (d, 1H) • 7.30-7.10 (m, 5H) • 6.82 (m, 1H) • 5.99-5.77 (m, 3H) • 4.22-3.92 (m, 6H) • 3.61 (m, 1H) • 1.65 (m, 4H) • 1.26-0.71 (m, 6H) 31P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.99 (s, 0.6P) • 20.08 (s, 0.4P) MS (M+1) 535

Example 24

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (d, 1H) • 8.08 (d, 1H) • 7.28-6.74 (m, 10H) • 5.90 (m, 4H) • 4.37 (m, 1H) • 4.05 (m, 5H) • 3.56 (m, 2H) • 2.99 (m, 2H) • 1.55 (m, 2H) • 1.22 (m, 3H) • 0.88 (m, 3H) 31P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.95 (s, 0.5P) 20.01 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 611

Example 25

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.38 (d, 1H) • 8.11 (s, 1H) • 7.31-7.11 (m, 5H) • 6.82 (s, 1H) • 5.96-5.76 (m, 4H) • 4.22-3.63 (m, 6H) • 2.17 (bm, 2H) • 1.65 (m, 2H) 1.30 (m, 4H) • 0.88 (m, 3H). ³¹P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.75 (s, 0.5P) • 19.82 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 521

Example 26

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.40 (d, 1H) • 8.09 (d, 1H) • 7.27-6.74 (m, 10H) • 5.93-5.30 (m, 4H) • 4.39 (m, 1H) • 4.14-3.77 (m, 4H) • 3.58 (m, 2H) • 2.95 (m, 2H) • 1.90 (m, 3H) • 1.26 (m, 1H) • 0.85 (m, 6H). ³¹P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.97 (s, 0.5P) • 20.04 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 611

Example 27

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.31 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 6.02 (s, 1H), 5.98 (m, 1H), 4.98 (m, 2H), 4.01 (m, 2H), 3.66 (m, 4H), 1.23 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 530.2

Example 28

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.31 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 6.01 (s, 1H), 5.98 (m, 1H), 4.03 (m, 2H), 3.86 (m, 4H), 3.68 (m, 4H), 1.92 (m, 2H), 0.93 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 558.3

Example 29

¹H NMR (CD3OD): 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 5.99 (s, 1H), 5.97 (m, 1H), 4.01 (m, 8H), 1.66 (m, 8H), 1.32 (m, 8H), 0.96 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 642.4

Example 30

¹H NMR (CD3OD): 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.24 (m, 10H), 6.80 (m 1H), 5.90 (s, 1H), 5.71 (m, 1H), 5.25 (m, 4H), 4.57 (m, 2H), 4.51 (m, 2H), 4.05 (m, 2H), 3.46 (m, 2H), 2.92 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 706.4

Example 31

¹H NMR (CD3OD): 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 6.00 (s, 1H), 5.97 (m, 11), 3.93 (m, 4H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.60 (s, 3H), 1.51 (m, 26H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 666.5

Example 32

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (s, 1H) • 8.17 (d, 1H) • 7.32-6.82 (m, 5H) • 6.82 (s, 1H) • 5.98-5.81 (m, 3H) • 4.27-3.64 (m, 6H) • 1.94 (m, 11) • 0.90 (m, 6H) • 31P NMR (CDCl3) • 21.50 (s, 0.5P) • 21.37 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 521

Example 33

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (s, 1H) • 8.13 (s, 1H) • 7.27-7.14 (m, 5H) • 6.85 (s, 1H) • 5.97-5.77 (m, 4H) • 4.186-4.05 (m, 7H) • 1.60 (m, 3H) • 1.29 (m, 7H) • 0.90 (m, 3H) 31P NMR (CDCl3) 20.69 (s, 0.6P) • 19.77 (s, 0.4P) MS (M+1) 549

Example 34

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (d, 1H) • 8.07 (d, 1H) • 7.27-6.74 (m, 10H) • 5.91 (m, 2H) • 5.69 (m 2H) • 5.27 (m, 2H) • 4.55 (m, 2H) • 4.30 (m, 1H) • 3.69 (m, 1H) • 2.95 (m, 1H) • 5.05 (m, 2H) 31P NMR (CDCl3) • 20.94 (s, 0.5P) • 19.94 (s, 0.5P) MS (M+1) 595

Example 35

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (d, 1H) • 8.11 (d, 1H) • 7.28-7.10 (m, 5H) • 6.82 (s, 1H) • 5.98-5.76 (m, 3H) • 4.18-3.56 (m, 4H) • 3.59 (m, 1H) • 1.74-0.70 (m, 12H). 31P NMR (CDCl3) • 21.00 (s, 0.6 P) • 20.09 (s, 0.4 P). MS (M+1) 549

Example 36

¹H NMR (CDCl3) • 8.39 (d, 1H) • 8.12 (d. 1H) • 7.29 (m, 2H) • 7.15 (m, 3H) • 6.82 (s, 1H) • 5.94 (dd, 1H) • 5.80 (s, 3H)• 5.02 (m, 1H) • 4.23-3.58 (m, 6H) • 2.18 (s, 3H) • 1.23 (m, 6H). ³¹P NMR (CDCl3) • 21.54 (s, 0.5 P) • 21.43 (s, 0.5 P). MS (M+1) 507

Example 37

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.30 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 6.84 (m 1H), 6.00 (s, 1H), 5.95 (m, 1H), 4.06 (m, 8H), 1.31 (m, 12H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 530.3

Example 38

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.24 (m, 10H), 6.84 (m 1H), 5.91 (s, 1H), 5.75 (m, 1H), 4.08 (m, 6H), 3.60 (m, 2H), 2.90 (m, 4H), 1.21 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 682.4

Example 39

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.22 (m, 10H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.90 (s, 1H), 5.72 (m, 1H), 4.02 (m, 6H), 3.63 (m, 2H), 2.90 (m, 4H), 1.58 (m, 4H), 0.87 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 710.4

Example 40

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.22 (m, 8H), 6.95 (m, 1H), 6.82 (m 1H), 5.90 (m, 2H), 5.72 (m, 1H), 3.95 (m, 4H), 3.63 (m, 1H), 3.07 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 1.55 (m, 2H), 0.86 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 597.4

Example 41

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, 9H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.97 (m, 2H), 5.73 (m, 1H), 4.05 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 1.13 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 597.5

Example 42

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.33 (m, 10H), 6.83 (m, 1H), 5.92 (m, 2H), 5.15 (m, 2H), 4.25 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, 1H), 1.90 (m, 4H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 595.6

Example 43

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.15 (m, 5H), 6.83 (m, 1H), 5.98 (m, 2H), 4.10 (m, 5H), 2.50 (m, 4H), 2.01 (m, 3H), 1.22 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 567.3

Example 44

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.15 (m, 5H), 6.83 (m, 1H), 5.98 (m, 2H), 4.10 (m, 5H), 2.57 (m, 1H), 1.80 (m, 6H), 1.25 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 547.7

Example 45

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.17 (m, 5H), 6.85 (m, 1H), 5.99 (m, 2H), 4.66 (m, 1H), 4.12 (m, 3H), 1.56 (m, 4H), 1.28 (m, 3H), 0.88 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 549.3

Example 46

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.12 (m, 10H), 6.83 (m, 1H), 5.99 (m, 2H), 5.72 (m, 1H), 4.10 (m, 411), 3.65 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.79 (m, 1H), 2.50 (m, 1H), 1.89 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 623.4

Example 47

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.15 (m, 10H), 6.82 (m, 1H), 5.99 (m, 2H), 5.73 (m, 1H), 3.99 (m, 4H), 3.65 (m, 1H), 3.05 (m, 1H), 2.85 (m, 1H), 1.02 (m, 1H), 0.51 (m, 2H), 0.20 (m, 2H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 609.3

Example 48

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, 9H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.97 (m, 2H), 5.73 (m, 1H), 4.71 (m, 1H)), 4.05 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 1.49 (m, 2H) 1.07 (m, 3H), 0.82 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 611.2

Example 49

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.20 (m, 2H), 7.25 (m, 6H), 6.82 (m 1H), 5.95 (m, 2H), 5.68 (m, 1H), 3.93 (m, 6H), 3.50 (m, 1H), 3.20 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 0.95 (m, 6H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 617.3

Example 50

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.23 (m, 2H), 7.18 (m, 10H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.94 (m, 2H), 5.72 (m, 1H), 4.81 (m, 1H)), 4.05 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 2.25 (m, 2H) 1.81 (m, 4H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 609.3

Example 51

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): 8.25 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, 9H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.81 (m 1H), 5.97 (m, 2H), 5.73 (m, 1H), 4.71 (m, 1H)), 4.05 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 1.49 (m, 2H) 1.07 (m, 3H), 0.82 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)+ 611.4

Example 52

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.29 (m, 1H), 8.25 (m, 1H), 7.20 (m, 5H), 6.85 (m, 1H), 5.97 (m, 2H), 4.85 (m, 1H), 4.15 (m, 2H), 3.95 (m, 1H), 2.28 (m, 2H), 1.99 (m, 2H), 1.77 (m, 2H) 1.26 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 533.3

Example 53

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.29 (m, 1H), 8.25 (m, 1H), 7.20 (m, 5H), 6.85 (m, 1H), 5.98 (m, 2H), 5.18 (m, 1H), 4.03 (m, 7H), 2.15 (m, 1H), 1.95 (m, 1H), 1.26 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 549.2

Example 54

¹H NMR (CD₃OD): • 8.24 (m, 2H), 6.85 (m, 1H), 6.01 (m, 2H), 4.43 (m, 2H), 4.09 (m, 5H), 1.38 (m, 3H) 1.23 (m, 3H)

Mass Spectrum (m/e): (M+H)⁺ 513.2

Example 55

¹H NMR for mixture of diastereomers at phosphorus (300 MHz, CD₃OD ref. solv. resid. 3.30 ppm): • • (ppm)=8.22-8.27 (m, 2H), 7.09-7.34 (m, 5H), 6.84 (br s, 1H), 5.93-6.02 (m, 2H), 5.00-5.14 (m, 1H), 4.01-4.26 (m, 2H) 3.89-3.94 (m, 1H), 1.50-1.88 (m, 8H), 1.23, (br t, 3H, J=6.8). ³¹P NMR for mixture of diastereomers at phosphorus(121 MHz, ¹H decoupled): • • (ppm)=23.56, 22.27 (˜60:40 ratio).

Example 102

By way of example and not limitation, embodiments of the invention are named below in tabular format (Table Y). These embodiments are of the general formula “MBF3”

MBF₃: Sc.K1.K2

Each embodiment of MBF3, is depicted as a substituted nucleus (Sc). Sc is described in Table 1.1 below. Sc is also described by any formula presented herein that bears at least one K1 or K2 wherein each is a point of covalent attachment to Sc. For those embodiments described in Table Y, Sc is a nucleus designated by a number and each substituent is designated in order by number. Table 1.1 are a schedule of nuclei used in forming the embodiments of Table Y. Each nucleus (Sc) is given a number designation from Table 1.1 and this designation appears first in each embodiment name as numbers 1 to 2. Similarly, Tables 20.1 to 20.37 list the selected substituent groups by number designation, and are understood to be attached to Sc at K1 or K2 as listed. It is understood that K1 and K2 do not represent atoms, but only points of connection to the parent scaffold Sc. Accordingly, a compound of the formula MBF3 includes compounds having Sc groups based on compounds according to Table Y below. In all cases the compounds of the formula MBF3 have groups K1 and K2 on nucleus Sc, and the corresponding groups K1 and K2 are listed, as set forth in the Tables below.

Accordingly, each named embodiment of Table Y is depicted by a number designating the nucleus from Table 1.1, followed by a number designating each substituent group K1, followed by the designation of substituent K2, as incorporated from Tables 20.1 to 20.37. In graphical tabular form, each embodiment of Table Y appears as a name having the syntax:

Sc.K1.K2

Each Sc group is shown having various substituents K1 or K2. Each group K1 and K2 as listed in Table Y, is a substituent, as listed, of the Sc nucleus listed in Table Y. K1 and K2, it should be understood, do not represent groups or atoms but are simply connectivity designations. The site of the covalent bond to the nucleus (Sc) is designated as K1 and K2 of formula MBF3. Embodiments of K1 and K2 in Tables 20.1 to 20.37 are designated as numbers 1 to 247. For example there are 2 Sc entries in Table 1.1 and these entries for Sc are numbered 1 to 2. Each is designated as the Sc identifier (ie. 1 to 2). In any event, entries of Tables 20.1 to 20.37 always begin with a number, and are independently selected from Tables 20.1 to 20.37 and are each thus independently designated as numbers 1 to 247. Selection of the point of attachment is described herein. By way of example and not limitation, the point of attachment is selected from those depicted in the schemes and examples.

TABLE 1.1

TABLE 20.1

TABLE 20.2

TABLE 20.3

TABLE 20.4

TABLE 20.5

TABLE 20.6

TABLE 20.7

TABLE 20.8 42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

TABLE 20.9 50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

TABLE 20.10 58

59

60

TABLE 20.11 61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

TABLE 20.12 69

70

71

TABLE 20.13 72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

TABLE 20.14 80

81

82

TABLE 20.15 83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

TABLE 20.16 91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

TABLE 20.17 99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

TABLE 20.18 107

108

109

TABLE 20.19 110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

TABLE 20.20 118

119

120

TABLE 20.21 121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

TABLE 20.22 129

130

131

TABLE 20.23

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

TABLE 20.24

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

TABLE 20.25

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

TABLE 20.26

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

TABLE 20.27

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

TABLE 20.28

180

181

182

183

184

185

TABLE 20.29

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

TABLE 20.30

194

195

196

197

198

199

TABLE 20.31

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

TABLE 20.32

208

209

210

211

212

213

TABLE 20.33

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

TABLE 20.34

222

223

224

225

226

227

TABLE 20.35

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

TABLE 20.36

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

TABLE 20.37

244

245

246

247

Lengthy table referenced here US20090202470A1-20090813-T00001 Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.

EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

Example R1 R2 Ester MW 55 Ala OPh cPent 546.5  54 Ala OCH₂CF₃ Et 512.36 53 Ala OPh 3-furan- 548.47 4H 52 Ala OPh cBut 532.47 50 Phe(B) OPh Et 582.53 56 Phe(A) OPh Et 582.53 57 Ala(B) OPh Et 506.43 51 Phe OPh sBu(S) 610.58 58 Phe OPh cBu 608.57 49 Phe OCH₂CF₃ iBu 616.51 59 Ala(A) OPh Et 506.43 48 Phe OPh sBu(R) 610.58 60 Ala(B) OPh CH₂cPr 532.47 61 Ala(A) OPh CH₂cPr 532.47 62 Phe(B) OPh nBu 610.58 63 Phe(A) OPh nBu 610.58 47 Phe OPh CH₂cPr 608.57 46 Phe OPh CH₂cBu 622.59 45 Ala OPh 3-pent 548.51 64 ABA(B) OPh Et 520.46 65 ABA(A) OPh Et 520.46 44 Ala OPh CH₂cBu 546.5  43 Met OPh Et 566.55 42 Pro OPh Bn 594.54 66 Phe(B) OPh iBu 610.58 67 Phe(A) OPh iBu 610.58 41 Phe OPh iPr 596.56 40 Phe OPh nPr 596.56 79 Ala OPh CH₂cPr 532.47 68 Phe OPh Et 582.53 69 Ala OPh Et 506.43 70 ABA OPh nPent 562.54 39 Phe Phe nPr 709.71 38 Phe Phe Et 681.66 37 Ala Ala Et 529.47 71 CHA OPh Me 574.55 36 Gly OPh iPr 506.43 35 ABA OPh nBu 548.51 34 Phe OPh allyl 594.54 33 Ala OPh nPent 548.51 32 Gly OPh iBu 520.46 72 ABA OPh iBu 548.51 73 Ala OPh nBu 534.48 31 CHA CHA Me 665.7  30 Phe Phe Allyl 705.68 29 ABA ABA nPent 641.48 28 Gly Gly iBu 557.52 27 Gly Gly iPr 529.47 26 Phe OPh iBu 610.58 25 Ala OPh nPr 520.46 24 Phe OPh nBu 610.58 23 ABA OPh nPr 534.48 22 ABA OPh Et 520.46 21 Ala Ala Bn 653.61 20 Phe Phe nBu 737.77 19 ABA ABA nPr 585.57 18 ABA ABA Et 557.52 17 Ala Ala nPr 557.52 74 Ala OPh iPr 520.46 75 Ala OPh Bn 568.5  16 Ala Ala nBu 585.57 15 Ala Ala iBu 585.57 14 ABA ABA nBu 613.63 13b ABA ABA iPr 585.57 12b Ala OPh iBu 534.48 77 ABA OPh Me 506.43 78 ABA OPh iPr 534.48 11b ABA ABA iBu 613.63

-   -   wherein Ala represents L-alanine, Phe represents         L-phenylalanine, Met represents L-methionine, ABA represents         (S)-2-aminobutyric acid, Pro represents L-proline, CHA         represents 2-amino-3-(S)cyclohexylpropionic acid, Gly represents         glycine;     -   K1 or K2 amino acid carboxyl groups are esterified as denoted in         the ester column, wherein     -   cPent is cyclopentane ester; Et is ethyl ester, 3-furan-4H is         the (R) tetrahydrofuran-3-yl ester; cBut is cyclobutane ester;         sBu(S) is the (S) secButyl ester; sBu(R) is the (R) secButyl         ester; iBu is isobutyl ester; CH₂cPr is methylcyclopropane         ester, nBu is n-butyl ester; CH₂cBu is methylcyclobutane ester;         3-pent is 3-pentyl ester; nPent is nPentyl ester; iPr is         isopropyl ester, nPr is nPropyl ester; allyl is allyl ester; Me         is methyl ester; Bn is Benzyl ester; and     -   wherein A or B in parentheses denotes one stereoisomer at         phosphorus, with the least polar isomer denoted as (A) and the         more polar as (B).

All literature and patent citations above are hereby expressly incorporated by reference at the locations of their citation. Specifically cited sections or pages of the above cited works are incorporated by reference with specificity. The invention has been described in detail sufficient to allow one of ordinary skill in the art to make and use the subject matter of the following Embodiments. It is apparent that certain modifications of the methods and compositions of the following Embodiments can be made within the scope and spirit of the invention.

In the embodiments hereinbelow, the subscript and superscripts of a given variable are distinct. For example, R₁ is distinct from R¹.

LENGTHY TABLES The patent application contains a lengthy table section. A copy of the table is available in electronic form from the USPTO web site (http://seqdata.uspto.gov/?pageRequest=docDetail&DocID=US20090202470A1). An electronic copy of the table will also be available from the USPTO upon request and payment of the fee set forth in 37 CFR 1.19(b)(3). 

1. A compound, including enantiomers thereof, of Formula 1A, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof,

wherein: A⁰ is A¹, A², or A³; A¹ is

A² is

A³ is:

Y¹ is independently O, S, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), or N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))); Y² is independently a bond, Y³, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —S(O)_(M2)—, or —S(O)_(M2)—S(O)_(M2)—; Y³ is O, S(O)_(M2), S, or C(R²)₂; R^(x) is independently H, R¹, R², W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein: R^(y) is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group; R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms; R² and R^(2a) are independently H, R¹, R³, or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or, when taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups; R³ is R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), or R^(3c), provided that when R³ is bound to a heteroatom, then R³ is R^(3c) or R^(3d); R^(3a) is R^(3e), —CN, N₃ or —NO₂; R^(3b) is (═Y¹); R^(3c) is -R^(x), —N(R^(x))(R^(x)), —SR^(x), —S(O)R^(x), —S(O)₂R^(x), —S(O)(OR^(x)), —S(O)₂(OR^(x)), —OC(Y¹)R^(x), C(Y¹)OR^(x), —OC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —SC(Y¹)R^(x), —SC(Y¹)OR^(x), —SC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)R^(x), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)OR^(x), or —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))); R^(3d) is C(Y¹)R^(x), —C(Y¹)OR^(x) or —C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))); R^(3e) is F, Cl, Br or I; R⁴ is an alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms; R⁵ is H or R⁴, wherein each R⁴ is substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups; W³ is W⁴ or W⁵; W⁴ is R⁵, —C(Y¹)R⁵, —C(Y¹)W⁵, —SO_(M2)R⁵, or —SO_(M2)W⁵; W⁵ is carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W⁵ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups; W⁶ is W³ independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 A³ groups; M2 is 0, 1 or 2; M12a is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; M12b is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; M1a, M1c, and M1d are independently 0 or 1; and M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; provided that the compound of Formula 1A is not of the structure 556-E.6

or its ethyl diester.
 2. The compound of claim 1 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl
 3. The compound of claim 1 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl.
 4. The compound of claim 1 wherein R² is selected from selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl.
 5. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1B


6. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1C


7. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1D


8. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1E


9. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1F


10. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1G


11. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1H


12. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1I

wherein: Y⁴ is N or C(R³).
 13. The compound of claim 1 that has the formula 1J


14. The compound of claim 1 wherein R^(2a) is halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl.
 15. The compound of claim 1 wherein R^(x) is a naturally occurring amino acid.
 16. A compound, enantiomers thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof that is of the general structure of formula I

wherein B is Base; Z is O, S, or C(R^(k))₂; R^(3e) is F, Cl, Br or I; A^(6k) —CH₂P(Y^(k))(A^(5k))(Y^(k2)A^(5k)), —CH₂p(Y^(k))(A^(5k))(A^(5k)), or —CH₂P(Y^(k))(Y^(k2)A^(5k))(Y^(k2)A^(5k)), optionally substituted with R^(k); A^(5k) is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with R^(k); Y^(k) is O or S; Y^(k2) is O, N(R^(k)), or S; and each R² and R^(2a) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; and each R^(k) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; provided that the compound of Formula 1A is not of the structure 556-E.6

or its ethyl diester.
 17. The compound of claim 16 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl
 18. The compound of claim 16 wherein R^(2a) is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, alkyl, azido, cyano, or haloalkyl.
 19. The compound of claim 1 selected from: a) Formula 1A wherein A⁰ is A³; b) Formula 1A wherein A⁰ is

c) Formula 1A wherein: A⁰ is

and each R² and R^(2a) is H; d) Formula 1A wherein: A³ is

R³ is —N(R^(x))(R^(x)); each R² and R^(2a) is H. e) Formula 1A wherein: A⁰ is

and each R² and R^(2a) is H.
 20. The compound of claim 1, wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein: Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and M12d is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or
 8. 21. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:


22. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.
 23. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R² groups.
 24. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:


25. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein: Y^(1a) is O or S; Y^(2b) is O or N(R²); and Y^(2c) is O, N(R^(y)) or S; and each R² and R^(2a) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl.
 26. The compound of claim 1 wherein A³ is of the formula:

wherein each R is independently H or alkyl.
 27. The compound of claim 1 which is isolated and purified.
 28. A compound of formula MBF I, or prodrugs, solvates, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or esters thereof

wherein each K1 and K2 are independently selected from the group consisting of A^(5k) and Y^(k2)A^(5k); Y^(k2) is O, N(R^(k)), or S; B is Base; A^(5k) is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with R^(k); and R^(k) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amino, amino acid, alkoxy, aryloxy, cyano, azido, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, and heteroaryl; provided that when B is adenine, then both K1 and K2 are not simultaneously both —OH or —OEt.
 29. The compound of claim 28 wherein B is selected form the group consisting of 2,6-diaminopurine, guanine, adenine, cytosine, 5-fluoro-cytosine, monodeaza, and monoaza analogues thereof.
 30. The compound of claim 28 wherein MBF I is of the formula


31. The compound of claim 1 wherein B is selected from the group consisting of adenine, guanine, cytosine, uracil, thymine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaadenine, inosine, nebularine, nitropyrrole, nitroindole, 2-aminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, hypoxanthine, pseudouridine, pseudocytosine, pseudoisocytosine, 5-propynylcytosine, isocytosine, isoguanine, 7-deazaguanine, 2-thiopyrimidine, 6-thioguanine, 4-thiothymine, 4-thiouracil, O⁶-methylguanine, N⁶-methyladenine, O⁴-methylthymine, 5,6-dihydrothymine, 5,6-dihydrouracil, 4-methylindole, substituted triazole, and pyrazolo[3,4-D]pyrimidine.
 32. The compound of claim 1 wherein B is selected form the group consisting of adenine, guanine, cytosine, uracil, thymine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaguanine, 7-deaza-8-azaadenine, aminopurine, 2-amino-6-chloropurine, 2,6-diaminopurine, and 7-deazaguanine.
 33. The compound of claim 1 that is selected from Table Y.
 34. The compound of claim 28 wherein K1 and K2 are selected from Table 100 TABLE 100 K1 K2 Ester Ala OPh cPent Ala OCH₂CF₃ Et Ala OPh 3-furan-4H Ala OPh cBut Phe(B) OPh Et Phe(A) OPh Et Ala(B) OPh Et Phe OPh sBu(S) Phe OPh cBu Phe OCH₂CF₃ iBu Ala(A) OPh Et Phe OPh sBu(R) Ala(B) OPh CH₂cPr Ala(A) OPh CH₂cPr Phe(B) OPh nBu Phe(A) OPh nBu Phe OPh CH₂cPr Phe OPh CH₂cBu Ala OPh 3-pent ABA(B) OPh Et ABA(A) OPh Et Ala OPh CH₂cBu Met OPh Et Pro OPh Bn Phe(B) OPh iBu Phe(A) OPh iBu Phe OPh iPr Phe OPh nPr Ala OPh CH₂cPr Phe OPh Et Ala OPh Et ABA OPh nPent Phe Phe nPr Phe Phe Et Ala Ala Et CHA OPh Me Gly OPh iPr ABA OPh nBu Phe OPh allyl Ala OPh nPent Gly OPh iBu ABA OPh iBu Ala OPh nBu CHA CHA Me Phe Phe Allyl ABA ABA nPent Gly Gly iBu Gly Gly iPr Phe OPh iBu Ala OPh nPr Phe OPh nBu ABA OPh nPr ABA OPh Et Ala Ala Bn Phe Phe nBu ABA ABA nPr ABA ABA Et Ala Ala nPr Ala OPh iPr Ala OPh Bn Ala Ala nBu Ala Ala iBu ABA ABA nBu ABA ABA iPr Ala OPh iBu ABA OPh Me ABA OPh iPr ABA ABA iBu

wherein Ala represents L-alanine, Phe represents L-phenylalanine, Met represents L-methionine, ABA represents (S)-2-aminobutyric acid, Pro represents L-proline, CHA represents 2-amino-3-(S)cyclohexylpropionic acid, Gly represents glycine; K1 or K2 amino acid carboxyl groups are esterified as denoted in the ester column, wherein cPent is cyclopentane ester; Et is ethyl ester, 3-furan-4H is the (R) tetrahydrofuran-3-yl ester; cBut is cyclobutane ester; sBu(S) is the (S) secButyl ester; sBu(R) is the (R) secButyl ester; iBu is isobutyl ester; CH₂cPr is methylcyclopropane ester, nBu is n-butyl ester; CH₂cBu is methylcyclobutane ester; 3-pent is 3-pentyl ester; nPent is nPentyl ester; iPr is isopropyl ester, nPr is nPropyl ester; allyl is allyl ester; Me is methyl ester; Bn is Benzyl ester; and wherein A or B in parentheses denotes one stereoisomer at phosphorus, with the least polar isomer denoted as (A) and the more polar as (B).
 35. A compound of formula B, and the salts and solvates thereof.

wherein: A³ is:

Y¹ is independently O, S, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), or N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))); Y² is independently a bond, O, N(R^(x)), N(O)(R^(x)), N(OR^(x)), N(O)(OR^(x)), N(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —S(O)_(M2)—, or —S(O)_(M2)—S(O)_(M2)—; and when Y² joins two phosphorous atoms Y² can also be C(R²)(R²); R^(x) is independently H, R¹, R², W³, a protecting group, or the formula:

wherein: R^(y) is independently H, W³, R² or a protecting group; R¹ is independently H or alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms; R² and R^(2a) are independently H, R¹, R³, or R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups or taken together at a carbon atom, two R² groups form a ring of 3 to 8 carbons and the ring may be substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups; R³ is R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c) or R^(3d), provided that when R³ is bound to a heteroatom, then R³ is R^(3c) or R^(3d); R^(3a) is F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, N₃ or —NO₂; R^(3b) is Y¹; R^(3c) is -R^(x), —N(R^(x))(R^(x)), —SR^(x), —S(O)R^(x), —S(O)₂R^(x), —S(O)(OR^(x)), —S(O)₂(OR^(x)), —OC(Y¹)R^(x), —OC(Y¹)OR^(x), —OC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —SC(Y¹)R^(x), —SC(Y¹)OR^(x), —SC(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)R^(x), —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)OR^(x), or —N(R^(x))C(Y¹)((R^(x))(R^(x))); R^(3d) is —C(Y¹)R^(x), —C(Y¹)OR^(x) or —C(Y¹)(N(R^(x))(R^(x))); R⁴ is an alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2 to 18 carbon atoms; R⁵ is R⁴ wherein each R⁴ is substituted with 0 to 3 R³ groups; W³ is W⁴ or W⁵; W⁴ is R⁵, —C(Y¹)R⁵, —C(Y¹)W⁵, —SO_(M2)R⁵, or —SO_(M2)W⁵; W⁵ is carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W⁵ is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R² groups; W⁶ is W³ independently substituted with 1, 2, or 3 A³ groups; M2 is 0, 1 or 2; M12a is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; M12b is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; M1a, M1c, and M1d are independently 0 or 1; and M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12; wherein A³ is not —O—CH₂—P(O)(OH)₂ or —O—CH₂—P(O)(OEt)₂.
 36. The compound of claim 35 wherein m2 is 0, Y¹ is O, Y² is O, M12b and M12a are 1, one Y³ is —OR^(x) where R^(x) is W³ and the other Y³ is N(H)R^(x) where R^(x) is


37. The compound of claim 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is selected from the group of esters in Table
 100. 38. The compound of claim 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is a C₁-C₈ normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic alkylene, alkynylene or alkenylene.
 39. The compound of claim 36 wherein the terminal R^(y) of R^(x) is a heterocycle containing 5 to 6 ring atoms and 1 or 2 N, O and/or S atoms in the ring.
 40. The compound of claim 1 having the formula XX:


41. The compound of claim 1 having the formula XXX:


42. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutical excipient and an antivirally-effective amount of the compound of claim
 1. 43. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 32 that further comprises a second active ingredient.
 44. A combination comprising the compound of claim 1 and one or more antivirally active ingredients.
 45. The combination of claim 44 wherein one or more of the active ingredients is selected from Table
 98. 46. The combination of claim 45 wherein one of the active ingredients is selected from the group consisting of Truvada, Viread, Emtriva, d4T, Sustiva, or Amprenavir antiviral compounds.
 47. The combination of claim 44 wherein one or more of the active ingredients is selected from Table
 99. 48. The combination of claim 47 wherein one of the active ingredients is selected from the group consisting of Truvada, Viread, Emtriva, d4T, Sustiva, or Amprenavir antiviral compounds.
 49. The combination of claim 46 for use in medical therapy.
 50. The combination of claim 48 for use in medical therapy.
 51. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 42 for use in medical therapy.
 52. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 43 for use in medical therapy
 53. The compound of claim 1 for use in antiretroviral or antihepadinaviral treatment.
 54. A method of preparing the compound of claim 1 according to the Examples or Schemes.
 55. Use of a compound of claim 1 for preparing a medicament for treating HIV or a HIV associated disorder.
 56. A method of therapy for treating HIV or HIV-associated disorders with the compound of claim
 1. 57. A method of treating disorders associated with HIV, said method comprising administering to an individual infected with, or at risk for HIV infection, a pharmaceutical composition which comprises a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of any of claims 1-28.
 58. A compound of Table Y, provided the compound is not

or its ethyl diester. 